PDF RS DRG .............

Reachstacker 42-45 tonnes
Publ. no IDRG01.03GB
Operator's manual in original OPERATOR’S MANUAL
DRG 420-450
1 Foreword ................................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 About the operator's manual.............................................................................................. 1
1.2 About the documentation kit .............................................................................................. 4
1.3 Inspection and maintenance .............................................................................................. 5
2 Safety ..................................................................................................................................... 6
2.1 Safety and emergency equipment ..................................................................................... 8
2.2 CE-marking ........................................................................................................................ 9
2.3 ANSI/ITSDF marking ....................................................................................................... 10
2.4 Keep in mind ..................................................................................................................... 11
2.5 Fire................................................................................................................................... 18
3 Overview............................................................................................................................... 20
3.1 Description ....................................................................................................................... 20
3.2 Plates ............................................................................................................................... 25
4 Instruments and controls ...................................................................................................... 32
4.1 Warning and indicator lights............................................................................................. 36
4.2 Ignition key lock and start and stop button for the engine................................................ 38
4.3 Switches .......................................................................................................................... 40
4.4 Travel direction selector and parking brake ..................................................................... 53
4.5 Multi-function lever........................................................................................................... 55
4.6 Load handling .................................................................................................................. 56
4.7 Pedals .............................................................................................................................. 60
4.8 Steering wheel ................................................................................................................. 61
4.9 Driver's seat ..................................................................................................................... 65
4.10 Heating / Air conditioning ................................................................................................. 66
4.11 Control system ................................................................................................................. 68
4.12 Optional equipment.......................................................................................................... 89
5 Handling ............................................................................................................................... 92
5.1 Running-in ....................................................................................................................... 95
5.2 Daily inspection................................................................................................................ 96
5.3 Error codes ...................................................................................................................... 97
5.4 Operating ....................................................................................................................... 138
5.5 Load handling ................................................................................................................ 154
5.6 Customer settings via display ........................................................................................ 175
6 Inspection and maintenance............................................................................................... 186
6.1 Daily inspection.............................................................................................................. 187
6.2 Maintenance .................................................................................................................. 191
6.3 Service ........................................................................................................................... 221
7 Transporting the machine ................................................................................................... 223
7.1 Towing............................................................................................................................ 224
7.2 Lifting and transporting the machine.............................................................................. 226
7.3 Service position.............................................................................................................. 239
7.4 Long-term storage.......................................................................................................... 240
8 Environment and standards................................................................................................ 241
9 Specifications ..................................................................................................................... 243
10 Terminology ........................................................................................................................ 252
11 Index.................................................................................................................................... 255
Operator’s manual DRG 420-450 IDRG01.03GB

IDRG01.03GB Operator’s manual DRG 420-450
1 Foreword 1
1 Foreword
1.1 About the operator's manual
General
Thank you for choosing Kalmar as your machine supplier. We hope
that we will meet your expectations.
This Operator's manual contains information that you must keep in

mind for safe handling and optimal use of your new Kalmar machine.
Operator's manual, purpose

The operator's manual describes how the machine should be operated
and maintained in a correct manner.
Cargotec will not accept any responsibility for machine modifications

without permission from Cargotec. Further, Cargotec will not accept
any responsibility if other lifting devices, tools or work methods are
used other than those described in this manual.
Storage
The operator's manual should always be kept in the machine.
About machine version

The information in this publication corresponds with the machine's
design and appearance on delivery from Cargotec. Deviations may
arise due to customer adaptations.
Cargotec reserves the right to make changes to specifications and

equipment without prior notice. Information provided in the manual
applies at the date of issue.
Copyright
Cargotec Sweden AB
Duplication of the content in this manual, in whole or in part, is strictly

prohibited without written permission from Cargotec Sweden AB.
All duplication by any means, such as copying, printing, etc., is

prohibited.
Manufacturer
This machine is manufactured by Cargotec Sweden AB, SE-340 10
Lidhult, Sweden.

2 1 Foreword – Reading instructions
1.1.1 Reading instructions

Warning information
This manual contains descriptions of warnings that apply to your safety.
Warnings provide information about potential dangers that, if the
warnings are not followed, could result in injury or product damage.
DANGER
Situation that could lead to severe personal injury or
death if regulation is not followed.
WARNING
Situation that could lead to personal injury if regulation
is not followed.
CAUTION
Situation that could lead to product damage if
regulation is not followed.
Important information
Important information is denoted with NOTE and is intended to
facilitate the work process, handling or to increase understanding of
the information.
NOTE
Important information not related to safety.
Read the operator's manual

The symbol to the left is used in certain cases on the machine and
refers to important information in the Operator's manual.
000262
Read the operator's manual
Read the Maintenance manual

The symbol to the left is used in certain cases on the machine and
001128
refers to important information in the Maintenance manual.
Read the Maintenance manual

1 Foreword – Reading instructions 3
Optional equipment
There is a range of optional equipment available for the machine.
000264
Each description of optional equipment in the manual is marked with
a symbol, and contains an explanatory text. The symbol is positioned
Indicates optional equipment visibly by the text and image in question.
See the machine card for complete specifications of the machine's

product alternatives and optional equipment.

4 1 Foreword – About the documentation kit
1.2 About the documentation kit

Documentation kit
The following documentation is supplied for the machine:
• Operator's manual (in cab with machine).
• Maintenance manual.
• Spare parts catalogue with machine card.
There is supplementary documentation that can be ordered for the

machine:
• Workshop manual.
• Supplier documentation for engine, transmission, and drive axle.
Ordering documentation
The documentation is ordered from the dealer for Cargotec.
Always indicate publication number when ordering. The publication

number is printed down to the left on the cover and at the bottom of
all pages in the manual.

1 Foreword – Inspection and maintenance 5
1.3 Inspection and maintenance

General
Maintenance must be managed properly in order for the machine to
operate satisfactorily and at the lowest cost. Intervals for inspection
and maintenance refer to operation under normal environmental and
working conditions.
Maintenance described in this operator's manual can be performed by

the operator, see Chapter 6 Inspection and maintenance. It describes
the daily inspections that comprise ongoing checks and actions that the
operator should carry out when starting a shift.
Maintenance
For other maintenance not included in this operator's manual (service
and repairs), contact an authorised workshop.

6 2 Safety
2 Safety
General
Safety rules are intended to reduce the risk of personal injuries as well
as damage to the load or other property.
Only personnel trained for this machine may handle, operate, perform
service or be in its vicinity during its use.
The safety information in this operator's manual is intended for your
information and safety. It cannot, and is not intended to, cover all
possible events during operation. Responsible operators with the
right training is the only way to ensure the safe and prolonged use
of the machine.
The machine was thoroughly tested and adjusted before it left the
factory. This does not preclude the possibility that it has been damaged
during delivery. The machine must undergo a thorough inspection in
order to ensure correct function before being put into service.
Important to read the operator's manual

Incorrect operation may lead to injury and product, and/or property
damage. For this reason, please read this operator's manual very
carefully before using the machine. The operator's manual contains
important information about your Kalmar machine, the machine's
handling, safety during work and about the machine's daily inspection.
000262
In addition, you will obtain a lot of valuable information that makes

it easier for you at work.
The operator's manual should always remain in the machine. If it is lost
a replacement must be acquired immediately.
NOTE
Never use a machine that does not have an operator's manual.
Ask your foreman or supervisor if there is anything in the text you do

not understand or if you feel information is missing in any area.
Intended use
• The machine must only be used for what it is designed and
manufactured for, i.e. to lift and transport goods (whose weight
and load centre/centre of gravity do not exceed the machine's
maximum permitted load capacity). If it is used in any other
way or in potentially dangerous environments (e.g. an explosive
environment, an area with asbestos dust) then special safety rules
must be followed and the machine must be equipped for such
operations.
• The machine must not be modified or changed without permission
from Cargotec. In the event of modifications approved by Cargotec
the signs on the machine and documentation affected must be
adapted to apply to the modification.
In the event of modification or conversion without Cargotec's
permission Cargotec's product liability ceases to apply. Modification
and conversion may only be made if the knowledge exists to
verify and test the modifications and conversions. Modifications
and conversions must be documented (date and action) and the
organisation responsible must be stated with name and address.
Signs and stickers must be updated in accordance with the
machine's new design.

2 Safety – Safety 7
• The machine may not be operated on public roads unless it has

been adapted according to national road safety regulations.
• It is always the machine owner's responsibility to ensure that the
machine has approved fire-fighting equipment in accordance with
the regulations in force.
• The machine is designed for use in outdoor temperatures -30 °C
to 40 °C, relative humidity 10 to 90%, and max. wind speeds 12.2
m/s. In the event of deviations from this, contact Cargotec.
Operator requirements
• The machine may only be operated by specially trained operators
who have the work supervisor's permission to operate the machine.
• Laws and regulations regarding driver's licenses, operator ID, etc.
must always be followed.
• The operator must be aware of and follow all local safety rules.
• The operator must follow the manufacturer's instructions.
• The operator should read and understand the machine's warning
and information plates as well as understand and be able to use
the machine's safety and warning equipment.
Prohibited operation
Machine operation is prohibited:
• If safety and warning equipment such as rear view mirrors,
headlights, etc., do not function correctly.
• In case of defective brakes, steering or lifting equipment.
• If there are unauthorised persons or vehicles within the machine's
work area.
• If the machine has been repaired, modified or adjusted without the
supervisor's/work management's permission.
• If the machine is equipped with tyres not approved by Cargotec.
• Overload system for load handling is not working.

8 2 Safety – Safety and emergency equipment
2.1 Safety and emergency equipment

General
A good working environment has safety and emergency equipment to
make the operator's work easier and safer.
The machine may be equipped with the following safety equipment:
11
7
1, 8
10 13
016938
5 6, 12 9 3, 4
1. Back-up alarm. 8. Back-up light.
2. Revolving beacon. 9. External rear view mirrors.
3. Horn. Used to provide improved visibility while manoeuvring and
load handling. A rear view mirror on each side.
4. Electrically powered loud air horn
10. Control breaker for hydraulics.
5. Fire extinguisher
Cuts off all power supply and control signals to hydraulics.
A fire extinguisher may also be located externally.
11. Emergency exit, right-hand door and rear window
If the machine is equipped with fire extinguisher then it
( ).
must be approved in accordance with European standard
EN3. The fire extinguisher must be selected so that 12. Switch in driver's seat.
it is designed for use against fires in: fibrous fuels
Locks the transmission in neutral position and blocks
(Class A), liquid fuels (Class B), gaseous fuels (Class
the load handling functions if the operator leaves the
C) and electrical appliances. Adapted fire extinguishing
operator's station. In addition, a warning is activated if the
equipment can be ordered from Cargotec.
operator leaves the operator's station without applying
6. Seat belt. the parking brake.
With hydraulic vertically adjustable cab, the right-hand 13. Buzzer automatic spreading 20'–40' .
door's lock is blocked with a wire. The left-hand door is
blocked with a mechanical lock when the cab is raised.
7. Buzzer in cab to indicate alarm, overload or forgotten
action, for example, leaving cab without applying the
parking brake.

2 Safety – CE-marking 9
2.2 CE-marking
CE-marking
(Declaration of Conformity, only applies to machines marketed
within EU/EEA.)
This machine is CE marked. This means that upon delivery it fulfils the
applicable "Essential Health and Safety Requirements" specified in
the EU Machine Directive, 2006/42/EC, as well as other EU directives
relevant to this machine type.
As proof that the requirements are fulfilled, the machine is provided

with an EC Declaration of Conformity, issued by Cargotec for every
machine. The EC declaration also includes tools and options produced
by Cargotec. The documentation is a valuable document that must be
properly preserved and saved for at least 10 years. The documentation
013981 must always follow with the machine when it is sold.
Machine plates for CE-marking, machine and See example of EC Declaration after 11 Index.
attachment
Anyone making modifications that affect the safety of the machine
also assumes responsibility for them. If the machine is used for other
purposes or with other tools than what is specified in these instructions,
safety must be ensured in each individual case. The machine owner
is responsible that the machine is used in accordance with the
instructions in the operator's manual. In some cases the application
area may require a new CE marking and issue of new EC declaration
of conformity.
For additional information, see standards under chapter 8 Environment

and standards.

10 2 Safety – ANSI/ITSDF marking
2.3 ANSI/ITSDF marking

ANSI/ITSDF marking
(Only applies to machines for the North American market.)
This machine is ANSI/ITSDF marked. This means that upon delivery it

fulfils the basic safety requirements of ANSI/ITSDF B56.1.
Anyone making modifications that affect the safety of the machine also
assumes responsibility for them.
If the machine is used for other purposes or with other tools than what
is specified in these instructions, safety must be ensured in each
individual case. The machine owner is responsible that the machine is
used in accordance with the instructions in the operator's manual.
For additional information, see standards under chapter 8 Environment

017485
and standards.
Machine plates for ANSI/ITSDF marking, machine
and attachment

2 Safety – Keep in mind 11
2.4 Keep in mind

Interrupted operation and/or parking
CAUTION
Always turn off the electric power when the machine is
left, e.g. when parking or at the end of the shift.
Risk of fire!
Turn off the electric power with the battery
disconnector.
For machines with SCR-system (emission control with AdBlue):
NOTE
Wait for two minutes before the system voltage is disconnected with
the battery disconnector so that the SCR system has time to fully
drain, this is particularly important in cold weather.
NOTE
Never leave the operator's station without first applying the parking
brake (ON position).
NOTE
Always remove the start key if the machine is to be left unattended.
During work shifts
DANGER
The attachment is a tool that handles heavy loads.
Extreme hazard to personal health and risk of property
damage!
Never walk under hanging loads. Make sure that no
persons stand or walk under a raised work attachment,
regardless of whether it is loaded or not.
DANGER
External equipment may only be used if it is approved
by Cargotec.
damage!
Only use equipment that is approved by Cargotec.

12 2 Safety – Keep in mind
DANGER
The parking brake should never be applied when the
machine is moving, unless an emergency requires it.
Very heavy braking. Risk of machine tipping, load
tipping over, being dropped or damage to property
or extreme danger!
Stop the machine before applying the parking brake.
DANGER
The machine's work area is large and visibility from
the operator's cab is restricted.
damage!
Keep in mind:
• Always check that no persons are in the way of the
machine or its equipment. Also check that the area
upwards is free. If there are unauthorised persons
or vehicles within the work area then the machine
must be stopped.
• The operator must always face in the travel
direction and should operate with special care
where persons or vehicles may appear.
• The operator must adapt the speed to the load and
ground conditions, visibility, and wind conditions,
etc.
• The operator must pay extra attention and operate
with special care near electric power lines,
viaducts, docksides, ramps, doorways, etc.
• Always operate carefully so that the attachment
does not collide with posts, power lines, etc.
• Use available visibility-enhancing equipment such
as rear view mirrors and camera ( ).

WARNING
Transporting loads is associated with major risks.
Risk of roll-over and tipping over! Chance of load
damage to property! Extreme danger!
Respect the lifting capacity of the machine and
exercise the greatest caution during load handling:
• The machine must only be operated on even
surfaces, intended for the machine's total weight
and ground pressure.
• All transporting of loads must take place in
transport position. Exercise caution when
operating, think about the width and height so
that the boom or attachment does not collide with
poles, cables, etc.
• Do not transport the load in a higher position than
necessary since this may cause the machine to roll
or tip over.
• Always operate with the load facing uphill on an
uphill or downhill grade, never operate or turn
across a grade.
• Operate the machine in reverse if the transported
load obscures visibility to the front.
• No personnel may encroach or stand under a
raised load.
• The operator must avoid forceful acceleration
and heavy braking to prevent risk of tipping and
roll-over.
• The operator must always adjust the speed when
turning to prevent skidding and risk of roll-over or
tipping over.
In the event of tipping or roll-over, hold onto the
steering wheel and remain in the cab. Do NOT
attempt to jump out of the cab until any movement
of the machine has finished.
When handling special loads local regulations may
apply. Learn about them and follow them.
WARNING
The machine's load capacity is limited!
Risk of roll-over and tipping over!
It is forbidden to exceed the machine's load capacity.
See the rating plate and load diagrams. The machine's
stability limit can be exceeded if the overloading
system is not working.

WARNING
The strength of the roof window may be significantly
reduced in case of exposure to substances containing
aromatic hydrocarbons, ketones, esters, or chlorinated
hydrocarbons.
Low strength! Danger!
Check the surface layer of the roof window and
clean only with washer fluid or mild detergent. Rinse
thoroughly with lukewarm water afterwards. Replace a
damaged roof window that shows cracks or scratches
immediately!
WARNING
Lifting loads in very windy conditions is associated
with great difficulties.
Avoid lifting loads at wind speeds higher than 12.2 m/s.
WARNING
The machine emits exhausts during operation.
Health hazards and fatal danger in poorly ventilated
facilities!
If possible, avoid operating the machine indoors
in poorly ventilated premises. Use exhaust venting
equipment!
WARNING
Work position on the machine is located up high.
Risk of falling and bodily injury!
Always use steps and handles when you go up or
down from the machine. Always turn to face the
machine. Do not jump!
WARNING
Cab doors must always be closed when operating.
Risk of personal injury and crushing in case of
roll-over and tipping!
Always close the doors during the work shift.

WARNING
Passengers may only be carried in the cab provided
that there is a seat available for passengers. Do not
carry passengers on the machine outside the cab or
on the load.
Risk of personal injury!
A passenger in the cab must use a permanently
mounted extra passenger seat and seatbelt.
WARNING
The cab is equipped with longitudinal sliding, manual
or hydraulic ( ). The cab must ALWAYS be in the rear
position while operating the machine.
Warning - risk of crushing!
For manual sliding cab, always make sure that the cab
is locked in its rearmost position before operating,
and that the locks on both sides are secured with the
lock pins.
For hydraulic longitudinal displacement, the cab may
be positioned as desired (locking is automatic) when
stationary.
WARNING
The machine's hydraulic system includes accumulators
with high pressure.
Always exercise extreme caution when working
with the hydraulic system and avoid unnecessarily
remaining close to hydraulic components or hoses.
The accumulators must be drained prior to work in the
hydraulic system (see Maintenance manual).
WARNING
Handle batteries and connectors with great care during
charging and boosting (jump starting). Do not mix
up the battery terminals! Follow the instructions for
starting with a booster battery!
Danger of short circuit! Warning - risk of hydrogen gas
forming! Danger of sparks and fire! Hydrogen gas is
very explosive!
Batteries must always be equipped with covers over
terminals and connections. Connect positive terminals
first. Then connect the negative terminals in order to
avoid sparks that could ignite the hydrogen gas.

CAUTION
The machine uses oils and lubricants.
Health hazard in the event of protracted skin contact!
Avoid skin contact with oils and lubricants. Use
protective gloves.
CAUTION
AdBlue can irritate with skin and eye contact and if
inhaled.
Health hazard!
Handle carefully and avoid skin contact, wear
protective gloves. In the event of any contact with
the skin and spillage on clothing, wash the skin with
large quantities of water and change contaminated
clothing and gloves. In the event of eye contact, rinse
thoroughly with water for several minutes and seek
medical advice if necessary. If inhaled, breathe fresh
air and seek medical advice if necessary.
WARNING
Fire extinguishers contain dry chemicals.
Risk of breathing difficulties when using in an enclosed
space!
Use the fire extinguisher from the outside and into the
area to be extinguished. After use, ventilate the space
thoroughly.
CAUTION
Cracks or scratches result in reduced strength of the
roof window.
Low strength!
Replace a damaged roof window immediately.

CAUTION
The parking brake can be used as an EMERGENCY
BRAKE.
Brake shoe linings wear out and lose their braking
performance! Risk of unwanted movement by the
parked machine!
After emergency braking with the parking brake the
brake shoe linings must be checked as soon as
possible and replaced if necessary. Braking action of
the parking brake may be lost as the brake shoe linings
may have been worn down.
If the parking brake has been released mechanically
then it must always be reset to restore the machine's
parking brake function.
WARNING
Optional equipment such as two-way radio, remote
control door opener, etc. may emit non-ionising
radiation. Such equipment transmits within the
frequency band 100 - 500 MHz.
Danger of interference to active medical devices (e.g.
pacemakers).
Do not use two-way radios, remote control door
opener, etc. when someone with an implanted active
medical device is in the cab.
NOTE
Cargotec will not assume any responsibility for installed optional
equipment, which is not installed by Cargotec or an installer
approved by Cargotec.

18 2 Safety – Fire
2.5 Fire
Action in the event of fire
DANGER
In the event of fire the operator's safety must not be
compromised.
If given the opportunity, take the following action at
the slightest sign of fire:
1. Stop the machine and turn the ignition key to stop
position.
2. Leave the cab.
3. Switch off the system voltage with the battery
disconnector.
4. Alert the rescue services.
5. Try to extinguish the fire.
If this is not possible, leave the machine and the
risk area.
DANGER
Smoke can be extremely toxic.
Smoke subdues, suffocates and can kill people!
Smoke can cause damage to lungs and respiratory
organs even in small quantities.
Avoid breathing fumes, do not stand in the smoke.
Use breathing apparatus for fire fighting and work
with burnt material.

2 Safety – Fire 19
Fire prevention measures
DANGER
Residue from fuel, oils, grease or other flammable
materials on the engine or in the engine compartment
is a fire hazard.
Fire hazard!
Remove residue of flammable materials in the engine
compartment as soon as they are detected. Be extra
careful on hot surfaces such as exhaust systems,
manifolds or turbochargers. If leakage of oil, fuel or
coolant is detected, the reason should be investigated
and the fault corrected before starting the engine.
Make it a habit to make a visual inspection of the engine and engine

compartment during the daily inspection. This helps to quickly detect
if anything abnormal has happened or is about to happen. Look
particularly closely for oil, fuel, AdBlue or coolant leakage, loose bolts,
worn or poorly tensioned drive belts, loose connections, damaged
hoses and electrical cables. The inspection only takes a few minutes
and can prevent serious faults and costly repairs.
CAUTION
High-pressure washing of sensitive components may
lead to short-circuiting and cause malfunction.
Product damage!
Do not use a high-pressure washer on the cab, radiator,
battery compartment, electric components, control
units, connectors, cable joints, cylinder seals, stub
axles, axle seals and chains.
Action after fire

When handling a machine damaged by fire, or exposed to excessive
heat, the following safety regulations must always be followed:
• Check that the fire has been fully extinguished. Re-extinguish if
necessary.
• Make sure that system voltage is switched off with the battery
disconnector.
• Make sure that the machine is in a secure location, service position.
• Check for that there are no leaks which could cause damage to
the surrounding environment.
• Never touch the burned components with bare hands in order to
avoid coming into contact with molten polymer material.
• Use breathing apparatus, thick gloves and protective safety
goggles.
• Contact Cargotec.

20 3 Overview
3 Overview
3.1 Description
General
Machine DRG 420-450 is a reach stacker for handling containers
and trailer goods (with bottom lift attachment). It has a maximum lift
capacity from 42 to 45 tonnes, depending on machine model, and a
lifting height of 5 or 6 containers (9' 6" container).
3.1.1 Identification of the machine

Type designation of reachstacker
Each machine from Cargotec has a type designation. Example: Type
designation DRG 450-65S5XS indicates the following:
• D - Diesel engine
• R - Reachstacker
• G – Generation
• 450 - Lift capacity, 1st row, decitonne
• 65 – Axle distance, decimetre
• S – Spreading, adjustable top lift
• 5 - Max. no. of containers when stacking
• X – Extra counterweight
• S – Support jacks
Machine card
Cargotec machines are adaptable in different ways with product
alternatives and optional equipment. This is in order to satisfy as broad
a customer base as possible.
A machine card is supplied together with the spare parts catalogue.

The machine card contains complete specifications of the machine's
product alternatives and optional equipment.
The machine card must be updated when the machine is modified

and Cargotec must be informed.

3 Overview – Overview description 21
3.1.2 Overview description

General
This section provides a short presentation of the machine's parts, which
are pointed out in the overview figure below.
7
6
015576
1 2 3 4
1. Steering axle 5. Attachment
2. Engine 6. Boom
3. Transmission 7. Cab
4. Drive axle
Engine
The engine is a straight 6-cylinder turbocharged low emission engine
with intercooler. The engine provides the power for propulsion and
hydraulics.
The machine is equipped with one of the following engine alternatives:

• Volvo TAD1360VE Stage 3B/Tier 4i
• Cummins QSM11 Stage 3A/Tier 3
Transmission
The transmission is fully automatic with torque converter. It has 5
forward gears and 3 reverse gears. The hydraulic pumps for working
hydraulics are mounted on the transmission.
The machine is equipped with ZF 5WG261.
Drive axle
The drive axle (front axle) is equipped with a differential and hub
reductions of the planetary gear type.
Brakes
The machine has a brake circuit and is equipped with hydraulically
operated brakes. The brake units consist of fully enclosed oil-cooled
disc brakes with external cooling.
The parking brake is electro-hydraulically operated and brakes with a

disc brake. The disc brake acts on the drive axle's input shaft. The
parking brake is applied by spring force and released by hydraulic
pressure. Parking brake application is automatic if the ignition key
lock is switched off.

22 3 Overview – Overview description
Steering
The machine is steered with the rear axle. A double-acting hydraulic
cylinder acts on the wheel pair. The steering is linear, that is, the
steering angle is dependent on the number of steering wheel turns.
Load handling
The boom and attachment are used for load handling. The boom is
operated vertically (angle) and longitudinally (length).
The attachment is available in different versions. The attachment holds
the load secure. Securing the load and operating the attachment takes
place electro-hydraulically.
One of the following alternatives is selected for the machine:
• Top lift attachment.
• Top lift-attachment with hydraulic levelling .
• Top lift attachment with overheight legs .
• Bottom lift-attachment (for handling both containers and trailers)
.
• Tool changer (handles load handling with different subattachments)
.
Electrical system
The electrical system consists of electrical and electromagnetic
components such as battery, switches, cable harnesses, solenoid
valves, fuses and relays.
Control system
The machine has a computer-based control and monitoring system for
monitoring and controlling the machine's functions as well as handling
all functions in the machine, such as power electronics, drivetrain and
hydraulic system. The control system facilitates maintenance and
troubleshooting.
Cab
The cab is available in one version. Controls, instrumentation and
equipment are based on common modules whose functions are
customisable.
The cab consists of a supporting frame to withstand falling objects in
accordance with applicable standards. It is equipped with filtered inlet,
recirculation as well as heating or air conditioning.
The roof window is made of high-strength material and withstands
heavy blows, e.g. from falling objects.
The cab is horizontally adjustable, either manually, hydraulically ( ) or
vertically adjustable ( ).
Hydraulic system
The hydraulic system is divided in two parts, working hydraulics and
brake system.
The working hydraulics include hydraulics for steering, load handling
and cab functions. The working hydraulics are supplied from two
variable load-sensing axial piston pumps (a single pump and a double
pump) and a fixed gear pump for cleaning and cooling the hydraulic oil.
The hydraulic oil is cleaned with a low-pressure filter in the hydraulic
tank and/or high pressure filter ( ) after the hydraulic pumps.
The brake system is separated from the working hydraulics with its own
tank, fixed gear-pump, high-pressure filter, accumulators and cooler.

3 Overview – Overview description 23
Other equipment
Standard equipment
1 14 15 16 17
2
3
13
4
12
11 5
6
10
7
016966
9 8 23 22 21 20 19 18
1. Interior lighting 12. Storage compartment for the operator's manual.

Located behind the door to the right in the rear wall.
2. Interior rear view mirror
13. Emergency hammer for rear window.
3. Combined wiper, windscreen and roof
14. Work lights attachment, 2 lights
4. Steering wheel console with three individually adjustable
shafts with electrically adjustable height position 15. Work lights boom, 2 lights
5. Storage compartment in front panel. 16. Work lights cab roof, 2 lights
Cup holder for storage compartment in the front 17. Revolving beacon
panel. The cup holder can be mounted in any storage
18. Reverse alarm (right-hand side)
compartment.
19. Opening window right and left-hand door
6. Storage compartment for paper in the seat console
20. Tinted laminated windscreen
7. Work console with four individually adjustable shafts
with electrically adjustable height and length position 21. Steps and hand rail for entry to the cab with non-slip
plate on the steps and lower edge of the door sill
8. Refrigerated storage compartment right-hand side front
panel 22. External rear view mirrors
9. Door handle for cab instep 23. Horn
10. Bottle holder in left-hand door side.
Mesh pocket in right-hand door side; storage
compartment
11. Storage compartment in right-hand arm rest

24 3 Overview – Overview description
Optional equipment
2 3 4 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 5
6
13 7
8
12
9
11
10
017949
8 9 22 19 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 10
1. Audio system 17. Extra work lights front fender, 2 or 4 lights

2. Sun visor, rear window 18. Extra work lights boom, 2 lights
3. Sun visor, roof window 19. Timer diesel heater
4. Location for two-way radio 20. Mud flaps, front and rear
5. Seat for passenger with 2-point seat belt, to the left of 21. Raised air intake with pre-cleaner
the driver's seat
22. Central lubrication, machine
6. Sun visor, front windscreen
Central lubrication attachment (right-hand side)
7. Writing table with light
23. Noise insulation under engine compartment
8. Socket 12/24 VDC, 4 sockets
24. Lockable tank cap
9. Extra cup holder for the storage compartment in the
front panel 25. Fire extinguisher
10. Back-up camera with monitor 26. Auxiliary heater (electrical connection)
Equipment kit 1: start interlock, engine and cab heater
Distance warning function for back-up camera
Equipment kit 2: start interlock, engine and cab heater,
11. Storage compartment behind the driver's seat console
tank warmer hydraulics and brake system
27. Steps and hand rail by the mudguard
12. Air-suspension driver's seat with 3-point seat belt and
electrical heating 28. Electrically powered loud air horn
Head rest 29. Pause heater (Not positioned in figure)
Arm rest left-hand side 30. Tool kit (Not positioned in figure)
13. Alcolock 31. Non-slip plate on tank and wings (Not positioned
14. Extra work lights attachment, 2 lights in figure)
15. Work lights bottom lift attachment, 2 lights

16. Rear view mirrors fitted above the wings

3 Overview – Plates 25
3.2 Plates
Product plates Europe
The following shows what product plates should be fitted on the
machine when operating in Europe. When ordering spare parts and in
case of enquiries always state model designation and serial number
in accordance with the plates. The plates' part numbers are stated
on each respective plate.
015578
1, 3 1, 3
1. Machine plate (example), A54516.XXXX

T = Machine type
M = Machine model
S/N = Serial number/Year of manufacture
Q = Machine's classed lift capacity acc. ISO3691-2
P = Engine power
W = Machine's operating weight (without load)
L = Distance between leading edge of wheels and load's centre of
gravity
H = Classed lifting height
013981
Field H and L indicate how big a load the machine can handle at a
specified attachment height (H) and distance from the machine's
leading edge (L).
Machine plate can only be ordered with complete engraving.
2. Type plate for attachment (example)
Weight = Attachment weight.
Type = Attachment type
Serial No. = Serial number.
Manufacturing Year = Year of manufacture.
016351
Type plate can only be ordered with complete engraving.
3. Additional plate for optional equipment (example), A54516.XXXX

The plate's design depends on type of optional equipment. The
sample plate is for a machine with support jacks.
M = Machine model
S/N= Serial number/Year of manufacture.
L = Distance between leading edge of wheels and load's centre of
gravity
H = Classed lifting height
Field H and L indicate how big a load the machine can handle at a
013982
specified attachment height (H) and distance from the machine's

leading edge (L).
Plate can only be ordered with complete engraving.

26 3 Overview – Plates
Warning and information plates

The following figures show the warning texts and information texts
that are located on the machine. The operator must be aware of the
warnings and should also follow the instructions and information given
on the plates.
Make sure warning and information symbols on the machine and its
components are always easy to see and are legible. Plates that have
been damaged, illegible or painted over must be replaced immediately.
1b 3 1a 4 3 1b 27 1b 13 3 10 28 9 1a 1b
2 21, 22 8 24 28 21, 22 21, 22 25 23 14 15 21, 22 2

26
1a
28
016977
13 16, 17, 18 19, 20 4 2 9 12 7, 1 1z
Frame, cab
Frame, cab
1. Lift point, 423049.0100
Attaching point for lifting device when lifting the machine and boom.
For lifting the machine (1a):
• front part of frame
000276
• rear part of frame by boom mounting

For lifting boom (1b):
• front part of boom
• rear part of boom
2. Transport lock A38769.0100.
Fastening point for machine transport lock.
016612

3. Warning! A26939.0100
Warning! Read the operator's manual for information.
Emergency lowering, see section 6.2.10 Hydraulic system for
information.
Boom removal and installation, see section 7.2.2 Transporting the
machine for information.
000277
4. Functions, control lever, A61054.xxxx
016978
5. Warning! A55488.0100
Emergency cab lowering.
011834
6. Warning! A55488.0300
Lock for vertically adjustable cab.
014505
7. Warning! A30536.0300
No passengers allowed. Passengers may only travel in the cab
provided that it is equipped with a permanently mounted passenger
seat.
000280
8. Warning! A30770.0100
Air conditioning. Filling of refrigerant requires special competence
and authorisation (follow national legislation and local rules).
000281

9. Warning! A30770.0200
Air conditioning. Located on right frame member.
Filling of refrigerant requires special competence and authorisation
(follow national legislation and local rules).
000282 10. Warning! A54527.0200

Air conditioning. Filling of refrigerant requires special competence
and authorisation (follow national legislation and local rules).
1 = Refrigerant, type
2 = Amount, kg
3 = Pressure, bar
1
2
014528
11. Warning! A30531.0200

Risk of crushing.
005225
12. Plate for non-ionising radiation, A57336.0100 .

Must be fitted on machines equipped with two-way radio or other
form of customised optional equipment in the cab that may emit
non-ionising radiation. The sign can be ordered from Cargotec if
necessary.
012968
Safety
Safety
13. Warning! A32442.0100
Do not jump. Always stay in the machine when there is a risk of
roll-over and hold on to the steering wheel.
000284
14. Plate battery voltage, A30534.0200

Switch off the battery voltage (with battery disconnector) when
removing/installing boom. Otherwise sparks and short-circuiting
may occur.
001979
A30534.0200

Engine
Engine
15. Filling point, fuel, 450202.0100
000286
450202.0100
16. Filling point, AdBlue (filler cap)
016976
17. Warning! A30530.0100

Rotating fan.
000287
18. Warning! A30532.0100

Hot surfaces.
000288
19. Warning! Filling point, coolant, A57775.0100

Use only ready-mixed recommended coolant.
013692
20. Filling point, engine oil, A32439.0600

016980

Power transmission, wheels
Power transmission, wheels

21. Filling point, transmission oil, A32439.0700
016979
22. Inflation pressure, factory-fitted tyres
A32049.0100 1.0 MPa
NOTE
000290
Read chapter 6 Inspection and maintenance regarding safety when
handling wheels.
The conditions for inflation pressure change if factory-fitted tyres
are replaced with another tyre brand! Contact Cargotec. The
plate for tyre air pressure must be replaced with a plate with the
applicable tyre pressure!
23. Warning! A57480.0300

Risk of explosion when working with tyres and rims, see section
6.2.11 Tyres and rims for information.
016981
Brake system
Brake system
24. Filling point, oil for brake system, 450203.0100
000292
Hydraulic system
Hydraulic system
25. Filling point hydraulic oil, 450203.0100
000292

26. Pressure hydraulics, A54518 (example below)

Indication of the machine's set pressures. The figures are
engraved.
016331
27. Warning! A30529.0100
Pressure. Always release the pressure from the accumulators
before working on the hydraulic system.
Work with the hydraulic system shall always be performed by
authorised personnel!
000294
Attachment
Attachment
28. Warning! A30533.0200
Rotating parts.
000853
29. Warning! A32440.0100

Do not walk or stand under a suspended load.
000296

32 4 Instruments and controls
4 Instruments and controls

General
Do not operate the machine before you know the position and function
of instruments and controls, and completely understand how they are
used!
This chapter gives general information about instruments, switches,

controls and other equipment in the machine's cab.
NOTE
Thoroughly read the following chapter about instruments and
controls.
Cab overview
1 2 3 4 5
7 017968
13 12 11 10 9 8
1. Travel direction selector and parking brake 8. Right-hand dashboard panel, rear section
2. Multi-function lever 9. Arm rest and storage box
3. Steering wheel 10. Driver's seat
4. Steering wheel panel 11. Accelerator
5. Display with function keys 12. Brake pedals
6. Right-hand dashboard panel, front section 13. Joystick or mini steering wheel
7. Right-hand dashboard panel, centre section
Rear cab section, see Rear cab section, page 35.

4 Instruments and controls – Instruments and controls 33
Steering wheel panel

14. Ignition key lock
14
21 22 23 30 16 17 15. Engine start and stop button
16. Indicator light, parking brake
17. Indicator light, high beams
18
18. Indicator light for active errors
24 19
19. Indicator light for direction indicators
25 20 20. Warning lamp, by-pass of safety system
21. Switch for combined windscreen wiper, windscreen/roof window,
26 continuous
22. Switch for combined windscreen wiper, windscreen/roof window,
012692
intermittent wiping
27 28 29 32 31 33 15
23. Switch for windscreen flusher
24. No function
25. No function
26. Switch, windscreen wiper rear, continuous
27. Switch for windscreen wiper, rear, intermittent wiping
28. Light sensor
29. No function
30. Switch for manual shifting up
31. Switch for manual shifting down
32. Switch for automatic shifting
33. Travel direction indicator, Forward Neutral Reverse
Right-hand dashboard panel, front section
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 34. Control breaker for hydraulics

43
35. Switch for pause heater
36. Recirculation switch
37. Switch for defroster
38. Switch for reduced fan speed
41 42 44 45 46 39. Switch for automatic regulation of air conditioning

40. Switch for increased fan speed
41. Switch for increased temperature
42. Switch for reduced temperature
012693
43. Switch for cooling

47 48 49 50 51 52
44. Switch for air distribution, to the floor
45. Switch for air distribution, to the operator
46. Switch for air distribution, to the roof
47. Switch for by-pass of safety system
48. Switch for heated rear view mirror
Switch for heated rear windscreen
49. Control lever for electrically-operated mirrors
50. Switch, support jacks
51. Spare
52. Switch for radio mute

34 4 Instruments and controls – Instruments and controls
Right-hand control panel, centre section
Right-hand control panel, centre section

53 53. Control lever
d
c a Travel direction selector, Forward - Neutral - Reverse
b b Control for side shift / spreading / rotation / tilt ( )
a 54 55 56 57
c Switch to open the twistlocks
d Switch for alternative function
e Switch for tilt lock
f f Switch for levelling lock
54. Switch, bottom lift attachment, front legs
e
55. Switch, bottom lift attachment, rear legs
015582 56. Switch for automatic spreading 20'-40'
62 58 59 60 61 57. Switch for 30'-stop
Right-hand dashboard panel, centre section 58. Switch for twistlocks, automatic/manual
59. Switch, bottom lift attachment, clamping position
Switch for lowering overheight legs
60. Cab movement switch
61. Spare
62. Switch for horn
Right-hand control panel, rear section
Right-hand control panel, rear section
63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 63. Switch for work lights on cab

64. Switch for work lights on boom
65. Switch for work lights on attachment
66. Switch for extra work lights on frame
67. Switch for back-up light
68. Switch for length adjustment of the right-hand control panel
69. Switch for height adjustment of steering wheel
72 73 74 75
When the service menus are active, the buttons can be used for
selecting up/down in the menus.
70. Switch for height adjustment of the right-hand control panel
10:23
10
2 When the service menus are active, the buttons can be used for
20
0
rpm x 100
22
selecting right/left in the menus.
21° 1899999
km / h
71. Function keys and navigation wheel for control system
Pwr / No r/ ECO 72. Switch for headlights
16.7 t
D U
73. Switch, interior lighting

74. Switch, revolving beacon
75. Switch for flashing hazard lights
017925
71
Right-hand dashboard panel, rear section and display

4 Instruments and controls – Instruments and controls 35
Rear cab section
Rear cab section

76. Compartment for the operator's manual
77
77. Electronic box with fuses and relays
76
016431
Rear cab section

Roof panel
Roof panel
78 79 80 81 82 78. Light sensor

79. Indicator light, lowered support jacks
016432
80. Indicator light for locked twistlocks

81. Indicator light, contact
Roof panel 82. Indicator light for unlocked twistlocks
Control for load handling

For more information on controls for load handling and their functions,
see Operator's manual section 4.6 Load handling.

36 4 Instruments and controls – Warning and indicator lights
4.1 Warning and indicator lights

General
This section describes the warning lamps and indicator lights in the
cab. They indicate the status of subsystems/systems. An illuminated
warning lamp should be attended to immediately. An illuminated
indicator light informs of imminent action.
Warning lamps and indicator lights are grouped in the steering wheel
panel. The brightness of the lamps is adjusted according to the
ambient lighting conditions. All lamps light up briefly when the ignition
is switched on.
Numbers in brackets refer to the positions in Cab overview, page 32.
Indicator light, parking brake (16)

The light (red) is activated when the parking brake is applied.
If the indicator light flashes, the parking brake has been applied
000311
automatically (not by the operator) when the machine has stopped,

or released by the operator without the service brake pedal being
depressed.
The service brake pedal must be pressed down and the lever moved to
the released position to release the parking brake, provided that the
brake system is adequately pressurised.
To activate the parking brake it is sufficient to move the lever to the

position for applying the parking brake.
The service brake must be activated when the parking brake is

released otherwise the indicator light for the parking brake flashes
(position 16) and the event menu is displayed, see Event menu release
the parking brake, description, page 84.
Indicator light, high beams (17)

The light (blue) is activated when the high beams are on.
000309
Indicator light for active error codes (18)

The indicator light (orange) shows that the control system has one or
more active error codes.
000299
Indicator light, direction indicators (19)

The lamp (green) flashes when the direction indicators or hazard lights
are on.
000310

4 Instruments and controls – Warning and indicator lights 37
Warning lamp, by-pass of safety system (20)

The warning light (orange) shows the by-pass of safety functions.
NOTE
000300
By-pass takes place as long as the switch for by-pass of safety
system (position 47) is activated.
Travel direction indicator, Forward Neutral

Reverse (33)
Travel direction indicator for F (Forward), N (Neutral) or R (Reverse)
is activated to indicate the selected direction.
000403
Indicator light, lowered support jacks (79)
The indicator light (green) is illuminated when the support jacks are
000315
fully lowered.
Indicator light for locked twistlocks (80)

The indicator light (green) is activated when the twistlocks are locked
and with that the load.
000312
Indicator light, contact (81)

The indicator light (orange) is activated when the attachment has
contact with the load.
012697
Indicator light for unlocked twistlocks (82)

The indicator light (red) is illuminated when the twistlocks are unlocked
and release the load.
000314

38 4 Instruments and controls – Ignition key lock and start and stop button for the engine
4.2 Ignition key lock and start and

stop button for the engine
General
This section describes starting and stopping the engine.
Ignition key lock function
0 0 Ignition voltage and drivetrain are switched off, the key can
be removed.
Voltage to certain functions such as interior lighting, pause
I heater, alcolock and standby voltage control units.
14 I Ignition voltage switched on and drivetrain activated for
starting.
016968
14. Ignition
Start and stop button's function

The start button is used to engage the starter and is held down until
the engine starts. The ignition must be in the I position in order for
the start button to work. The engine can also be stopped by holding
the button down for one second.
NOTE
The machine is equipped with an electric restart interlock, which
prevents engagement of the starter motor when the engine is
rotating.
Conditions for the starter motor to engage are that the transmission
is in neutral position and that the engine is not already running.
012816
15
15. Start button

4 Instruments and controls – Ignition key lock and start and stop button for the engine 39
Alcolock function
The machine may be equipped with an alcolock. In order to start the

machine the operator must blow into the alcolock, which then measures
the alcohol content in the breath. A successful breath test permits
the machine to be started.
For information about statistics, etc., see the manufacturer's

instructions.
016631
Alcolock

40 4 Instruments and controls – Switches
4.3 Switches
General
This section describes the switches in the cab. Each switch controls
a function.
The switches on the panels have white pilot lights that change to
a green or red function light when the function is activated. The
brightness of the switches is adjusted according to the ambient lighting
conditions. All function lights in the switches light up briefly when the
ignition is switched on. Only those functions relevant to the machine
will then display a white pilot light or function light.
A white light in a switch indicates a function that can be activated.
The switch changes colour when a function is activated. When the
colour has changed to green, this indicates that the function has been
switched on.
Switch for combined windscreen wiper,

windscreen/roof window, continuous (21)
Switch (green) for combined windscreen wiper on the front
windscreen/roof window. Continuous wiping. Wiping is stopped when
the operator leaves the seat. It is reactivated when the operator is
012705
sitting in the driver's seat.

Wiping windscreen/roof window activated/deactivated with the press
of a button.
The switch is connected in parallel with the Switch, windscreen wiper
roof, continuous (position 25).
NOTE
Do not use the wipers on dry or dirty windscreens without first
activating the windscreen washers. The roof window is especially
sensitive to scratching and can be damaged by dry wiping.
Switch for combined windscreen wiper,

windscreen/roof window, intermittent (22)
Switch (green) for combined windscreen wiper on the front
windscreen/roof window. Intermittent wiping. Wiping is stopped when
the operator leaves the seat. It is reactivated when the operator is
012706
sitting in the driver's seat.

Intermittent wiping windscreen/roof window activated/deactivated with
the press of a button.
The event menu appears when intermittent wiper mode is activated,
see Event menu intermittent wiper, description, page 87.
Two time intervals can be selected:
• Short interval - one press of the button.
• Long interval - a further press of the button.
• Switch off - a further press of the button.
The switch is connected in parallel with the Switch, windscreen wiper
roof, intermittent (position 24).
NOTE

4 Instruments and controls – Switches 41
Switch for windscreen flusher (23)

Switch (green) for washing the screens. Washing occurs in the screens
where the wiper is activated.
012707
Pressing the button when no wipers are activated activates the front
wipers or the combined wipers on the front windscreen/roof window
and washing on each screen.
Wiping temporarily changes over to continuous wiping with window

flushing.
Windscreen washing is active as long as the button is pressed down.
Event menu appears with a low washer fluid level, see Event menu low
washer fluid level, description, page 83.
NOTE
Switch, windscreen wiper rear, continuous (26)

Switch (green) for windscreen wiper on rear window. Continuous
wiping. Wiping is stopped when the operator leaves the seat. It is
reactivated when the operator is sitting in the driver's seat.
012713
Wiping is activated/deactivated with the press of a button.
NOTE
Switch, windscreen wiper rear, interval (27)

Switch (green) for windscreen wiper on rear window. Intermittent
wiping. Wiping is stopped when the operator leaves the seat. It is
reactivated when the operator is sitting in the driver's seat.
012712
Intermittent wiping is activated/deactivated with the press of a button.
Two time intervals can be selected:

• Short interval - one press of the button.
• Long interval - a further press of the button.
• Switch off - a further press of the button.
NOTE
Switch for manual shifting up (30)

Switch (green) to shift up one gear. Shifting up takes place from
the current gear. If automatic shifting is selected, it is automatically
switched off if the switch for manual shifting up or down is activated.
012708
At the same time the switch colour for manual shifting up and down
goes from white to green.
The current gear is shown in the operating menu.

Switch for manual shifting down (31)

Switch (green) to choose to shift down one gear. Shifting down takes
place from the current gear. If automatic shifting is selected, it is
automatically switched off if the switch for manual shifting up or down
012709
is activated. At the same time the switch colour for manual shifting up
and down goes from white to green.
Downshift is activated with the press of a button. Manual shifting is

activated.
The current gear is shown in the operating menu.
Switch for automatic shifting (32)

Switch (green) for selecting automatic shifting.
Automatic shifting is activated by pressing a button. Feature automatic

012710
shifting is disabled if the switch for manual shifting up or shifting down

is activated.
Switch for pause heater (35)
Switch (green) for pause heater. The cab fan emits heat from the
012716
engine's cooling system during short-term parking of the machine.
Instructions for use:

a. Park the machine. Let the engine idle.
b. Set desired temperature (position 41, 42).
c. Press in the switch for pause heater (position 35).
d. Switch off the ignition with the ignition key lock.
The pause heater is now activated and strives to maintain preset
temperature for the cab.
If the cab temperature drops down to the set temperature, or pause
heater has been running for the preset time, the pause heater
stops running when the engine's cooling system can no longer
deliver the heat needed.
NOTE
The higher the preset cab temperature, the shorter the operating
time for the pause heater.
Recirculation switch (36)

The switch (green) for recirculation. If this function is activated, air
circulates inside the compartment without fresh air being taken from
outside and is used to prevent bad air, or unpleasant odours from
012717
entering the cab.
Recirculation is activated/deactivated with the press of a button.
Switch for defroster (37)

The switch (green) for the defroster can be used to quickly demist the
windscreens. When the defroster is activated the function controls fan,
temperature and damper position.
012718
The defroster is activated/deactivated by pressing a button or with any

of the other switches for the system. The defroster function switches
off automatically.

Switch for reduced fan speed (38)

Switch (green) to lower fan speed in the cab. When the fan speed
is controlled with the switch the automatic fan control is disengaged.
The automatic function is reactivated with the switch for automatic
regulation of air conditioning (position 39).
012719
Reduced fan speed is activated with the press of a button.
The fan speed is displayed in the operating menu.
The event menu appears when the fan speed drops, see Event menu
raise/lower fan speed, description, page 85.
Switch for automatic regulation of air conditioning

(39)
Switch (green) for automatic fan speed control, temperature control
and air distribution in the cab. With AUTO mode enabled, the control
system attempts to maintain the temperature set on the display. Fan
012720
speed, temperature control and air distribution in the cab take place
automatically.
Automatic regulation is reactivated with the press of a button if manual

control is selected with the buttons for air distribution or fan speed.
Temperature setting and fan speed are shown in the operating menu.
Switch for increased fan speed (40)

Switch (green) to increase the fan speed in the cab. When the
fan speed is controlled with the switch the automatic fan control is
disengaged. The automatic function is reactivated with the switch for
automatic regulation of air conditioning (position 39).
012721
Increased fan speed is activated with the press of a button.
The fan speed is displayed in the operating menu.
The event menu appears when the fan speed increases, see Event
menu raise/lower fan speed, description, page 85.
Switch for increased temperature (41)

Switch (red) to increase the cab temperature. Setting takes place in
steps of 0.5 °C.
012723
Temperature increase is activated with the press of a button.
The temperature range is 16 °C to 28 °C. Setting of max. temperature

switches off automatic climate control (control of fan, heat and air
distribution) and sets the heat valve in the max. position.
If necessary, cab air is cooled or heated to the set temperature.
Desired cab temperature is displayed in the operating menu.
The event menu appears when the cab temperature is increased,

Event menu raise/lower cab temperature, description, page 85.

Switch for reduced temperature (42)

Switch (blue) to decrease the cab temperature. Setting takes place in
steps of 0.5 °C.
012722
Temperature decrease is activated with the press of a button.
The temperature range is 16 °C to 28 °C. Setting of min. temperature

switches off automatic climate control (control of fan, heat and air
distribution) and sets the heat valve in the min. position.
If necessary, cab air is cooled or heated to the set temperature.
Desired cab temperature is displayed in the operating menu.
The event menu appears when the cab temperature is decreased,

Event menu raise/lower cab temperature, description, page 85.
Switch for cooling (43)

Cooling function switch (green).
Cooling is activated/deactivated with the press of a button.

012727
The system's cooling function does not start if the fan is switched off or
if the doors are open. If the doors are opened, the fan will be switched
off after a short while. If the doors are not closed after a further short
period then the cooling compressor will also be switched off.
Switch for air distribution, to the floor (44)

Switch (green) for air distribution, to the floor. When the air distribution
is controlled with the switch the automatic air distribution is disengaged.
012724
Air distribution toward the floor is activated/deactivated by pressing a

button. The air distribution can be combined toward the floor, operator
and roof.
Switch for air distribution to the operator (45)

Switch (green) for air distribution to the operator. When the air
distribution is controlled with the switch the automatic air distribution is
disengaged. The automatic function is reactivated with the switch for
012725
automatic regulation of air conditioning (position 39).
Air distribution to the operator is activated/deactivated with a press

of the button. The air distribution can be combined toward the floor,
operator and roof.
Switch for air distribution to the roof (46)

Switch (green) for air distribution to the roof. When the air distribution is
controlled with the switch the automatic air distribution is disengaged.
012726
Air distribution toward the roof is activated/deactivated by pressing a

button. The air distribution can be combined toward the floor, operator
and roof.

Switch for by-pass of safety system (47)

Bypassing the machine's safety features. Rocker switch.
The operator may, if the situation so requires, disconnect all safety
012733
features on the machine.
0 1
Position 0, normal function.
Position 1, bypass of the safety system permits the following:

• Lowering of load in the event of overload.
• Locking or opening of twistlocks without full contact.
• Spreading 20'-40' with locked twistlocks.
• Lifting without indication of locked or open twistlocks.
• Bottom lift without full contact.
• Lifting past height limitation on machines with limited lifting height,
see Height limitation, page 173.
The machine's overload system can still limit the lifting height.
• Rotation of attachment free of machine with rotation stop, see
Rotation stop, page 167.
• Controlling the load outside the LC-range (load centre) on
machines with LC-limitation, see LC-limitation, page 174.
The machine's overload system can still limit load position in
relation to the machine.
• Selection of travel direction without the sensor in the driver’s seat
indicating that someone is sitting in the seat, speed is limited to
10 km/h.
(The machine adopts neutral position when no one is sitting in
the driver’s seat.)
• Release of the parking brake in the event of a fault in the parking
brake or without the sensor in the driver’s seat indicating that
someone is sitting in the seat.
• Use of load handling functions at reduced speed without the sensor
in the driver’s seat indicating that someone is sitting in the seat.
Warning lamp for by-pass (position 20), shows when the by-pass of
safety features is activated.
WARNING
Safety features are blocked.
No safety system is engaged!
Only use bypass in emergency situations!
WARNING
By-pass of load handling functions must not be used
during normal load handling.
damage.
Only use the bypass in emergency situations.

Switch for electrically heated rear view mirrors

(48)
Switch (green) for electrically heated rear view mirrors. Rocker switch.
012792
0 1 Position 0 – Function for electrically heated rear view mirrors
deactivated.
Position 1 - The function electrically-heated rear view mirrors is

activated for a preset time.
If both the machine and cab are equipped with electrically heated
mirrors all of these are activated with the same switches.
If the cab is equipped with electrically heated mirrors and screens the
functions are activated with the same switches.
The event menu appears when the electrically heated mirrors

are activated and deactivated, see Event menu heating rear view
mirrors/rear windscreen, description, page 86.
Switch for electrically heated rear windscreen (48)
Switch (green) for electrically heated rear windscreen. Rocker switch.

012792
0 1 Position 0 – The function for rear windscreen heating is deactivated.
Position 1 - The function electrically-heated rear windscreen is

activated for a preset time.
If the cab is equipped with electrically heated mirrors and screens the
functions are activated with the same switches.
The event menu appears when the electrically heated rear windscreen
is activated and deactivated, see Event menu heating rear view
mirrors/rear windscreen, description, page 86.
Control lever for electrically-operated mirrors (49)
RO R
MIR R Control lever for setting the machine's mirrors.
L
Select left (L) or right (R) mirrors using the control lever.
Set the mirror with the help of the control lever.
Set the control lever in the centre position again to avoid unwanted
adjustment of the rear view mirrors.
015219

Switch, support jacks (50)
Switch (green), support jacks. Rocker switch. Lowering/raising can

be either manual (the switch must be held depressed throughout the
015594
1 0 2 lowering/raising) or automatic (a short press activates lowering/raising
to end position down or up). The setting can only be changed during a
service.
Position 1 - Support jacks are folded down. When the legs are folded
down, this is indicated by the indicator light for the support jacks
(position 79).
Position 0 – Support jacks are stationary.
Position 2 - Support jacks are folded up.
For support jack operation to be permitted requires a number of

conditions to be met, see Support jacks, page 170.
Switch for audio off (radio) (52)
Switch (green) for audio off in the cab, e.g. dampening of the radio
012731
0 1 volume.
Position 0 – Function audio off is deactivated.
Position 1 – Function audio off is activated.
Switch, bottom lift attachment, front legs (54)
Switch (green) controls the front legs on the bottom lift attachment.
015584
The front legs hold the load together with the rear pair of legs. Rocker
1 0 2 switch.
Position 1 - Front legs are folded down. The switch must be pressed
and held throughout the movement.
Position 0 – Legs are stationary.
Position 2 - Front legs are folded up. The switch must be pressed and
held throughout the movement.
See Instructions for bottom lift attachment, page 158.
Switch, bottom lift attachment, rear legs (55)
Switch (green) controls the rear legs on the bottom lift attachment.
015585
The rear legs hold the load together with the front pair of legs. Rocker
1 0 2 switch.
Position 1 - Rear legs are folded down. The switch must be pressed
Position 2 - Rear legs are folded up. The switch must be pressed and

Switch for automatic spreading 20' to 40' (56)
Switch (green) for automatic spreading of attachment to 40'. This

function is used to give automatic spreading of attachment at
015593
0 1 instantaneous function selection with the control lever.
To stop an ongoing automatic 20' to 40' spreading, activate spreading

in or out of with the control lever.
Position 0 – Automatic spreading 20' to 40' not activated.
Position 1 – Automatic spreading 20' to 40' is activated. (If the function

for 30' stop is activated, spreading stop takes place .)
See Automatic spreading 20'–40', page 167.
NOTE
Automatic spreading can only be activated with closed doors and
released parking brake.
Switch for spreading stop at 30' (57)
Switch (green) for spreading stop for attachment at 30' or 35'.

015590
0 1 This function is used to adjust the spreading of the attachment to the

container size (needs adapted). The distance for the spreading stop is
preset in the control unit.
Dampening comes into force shortly before the preset value for the
stop. In order to continue spreading, repeat the continuous spreading
function with the joystick to the desired position (end position is 40').
Position 0 – Spreading stop not activated.
Position 1 – Spreading stop activated. During the ongoing spreading,

stopping is performed automatically at 30' or 35".
Switch for twistlocks, automatic/manual locking

(58)
Switch (green) for locking the twistlocks. The switch is spring-loaded in
position 2.
Position 1 - Twistlocks are locked automatically when there is contact

015587
1 0 2 with the load. The parking brake must be OFF, see position 1 and
indicator light for parking brake, position 16.
Position 0 - Locking of twistlocks not activated.
Position 2 - Twistlocks are locked manually. Button spring-returns.
See Instructions for top lift attachment, page 157.

Switch, bottom lift attachment, clamping position

(59)
Switch (green) controls clamping position of the leg pairs on the bottom
lift attachment. Rocker switch.
015588
1 0 2
Position 1 - Leg pair releases the load. The switch must be pressed
Position 2 - Leg pair clamps the load. The switch must be pressed and
Switch for lowering overheight legs (59)
The switch (green) controls the legs on a top lift attachment with
overheight legs. Each leg has a twistlock which must all indicate
015589
1 0 2 unlocked twistlocks, see indicator light for unlocked twistlocks position

82, to enable operation of the legs. Rocker switch.
Position 1 - Legs are folded down. The switch must be pressed and
Position 2 - Legs are folded up. The switch must be pressed and held
throughout the movement.
See Overheight legs, page 169.
Switch, hydraulic sliding cab (60)
Switch (green), hydraulic sliding cab. Rocker switch. The operator's

door(s) must be closed and the control breaker for hydraulics not
015591
1 0 2 activated.
Position 1 - The cab moves forward. The switch must be pressed and
Position 0 – Cab is stationary.
Position 2 - The cab moves backward. The switch must be pressed

See Hydraulic sliding cab, page 171.
NOTE
The cab can only be moved if the doors are closed.

Switch, hydraulic vertically adjustable cab (60)
Switch (green), hydraulic vertically adjustable cab. Rocker switch.

The operator's door(s) must be closed and the control breaker for
015592
1 0 2 hydraulics not activated.
Position 1 - The cab is lowered. The switch must be pressed and held
Position 0 – Cab is stationary.
Position 2 - The cab is raised. The switch must be pressed and held
When the cab is moved from the lowest position, machine speed is
limited to 10 km/h.
See Hydraulic vertically adjustable cab, page 172.
NOTE
The cab can only be moved if the doors are closed.
Switch for horn (62)

Switch for horn. Rocker switch.
016330
Switch for work lights on cab (63)

Switch (green) for work lights on the cab. Also activates headlights,
rear lights and side running lights.
012760
Work lights on the cab are activated/deactivated with the press of a

button.
Work lights are turned off after idling for 5 minutes, extra work lights
after 2 minutes. Work lights are turned on again at throttle application,
gearshifting or activation of any load handling function.
Switch for work lights on boom (64)

Switch (green) for work lights on the boom. Also activates headlights,
rear lights and side running lights.
012762
Work lights on the boom are activated/deactivated with the press of a

button.
Switch for work lights on attachment (65)

Switch (green) for work lights on the attachment. Also activates
headlights, rear lights and side running lights.
012763
Extra work lights are activated/deactivated with the press of a button.

Switch for extra work lights on frame (66)
Switch (green) for extra work lights on lamp cluster housings on front
012764
mudguards. Also activates headlights, rear lights and side running
lights.
Extra work lights on the frame are activated/deactivated with the press
of a button.
Switch for back-up light (67)

Switch (green) for back-up light.
Back-up light is activated/deactivated by pressing the button when

012765
travel direction reverse is selected. The function of the back-up lights

is reset after ignition off/on to be switched on when travel direction
reverse is selected.
Switch for length adjustment of the right-hand

control panel (68)
Switch (white) for length adjustment of the right-hand control panel.
Length adjustment is activated with the press of a button.

012766
Switch for height adjustment of steering wheel

(69)
Switch (white) for height adjustment of steering wheel.
Height adjustment is activated with the press of a button.

012768
Switch for height adjustment of the right-hand

control panel (70)
Switch (white) for height adjustment of the right-hand control panel.
Height adjustment is activated with the press of a button.

012767

Function keys and navigation wheel for control

system (71)
Function keys and navigation wheel for control system, see 4.11
Control system, page 68.
017965
Switch for headlights (72)
Switch (green) for headlights. Also activates tail lights and side running
lights.
012771
The headlights are activated/deactivated with the press of a button.
Switch, interior lighting (73)

Switch (green) for interior lighting in cab.
The lighting is activated/deactivated with the press of a button.

012772
Switch for revolving beacon (74)

Switch (green) for revolving beacon used to attract attention in
connection with hazards.
012773
The revolving beacon is activated/deactivated with the press of a

button.
Switch for flashing hazard lights (75)

Switch (red) for flashing hazard lights used to attract attention in
connection with parking hazard.
012774
The warning beacon is activated/deactivated with the press of a button.

4 Instruments and controls – Travel direction selector and parking brake 53
4.4 Travel direction selector and

parking brake
General
This section describes the travel direction selector (position 1) that is
used to choose the direction and for the parking brake.
1
015215
1. Travel direction selector on steering column
Selecting direction of travel

Travel direction is selected with the travel direction selector on:
F P • steering column
• control lever, see Control lever (53), page 57
• mini-wheel, see Mini steering wheel, page 62
• joystick control, see Joystick control, page 63
N The lever is spring-loaded and the selected direction of travel is shown
on the steering wheel panel.
The current gear is shown on the display.
Selecting direction of travel:

• F - Forward. Move the lever forward for forward drive.
015430
R
• N - Neutral. Neutral. Move the lever up or down for neutral.
• R - Reverse. Move the lever backward for reverse drive.
Travel direction selector on steering column
Manual up and down shifting is performed using the switches for
manual shifting up (position 30) and manual shifting down (position 31).
Selection of automatic shifting is done with the switch for automatic
shifting (position 32).

54 4 Instruments and controls – Travel direction selector and parking brake
Parking brake
Activation of the parking brake is performed with the travel direction
F P selector. Lift the control upward toward the steering wheel and then
move it forward to the parking braking position. The parking brake
indicator light shows when the parking brake is activated, see Indicator
light, parking brake (16), page 36.
Deactivate the parking brake by pressing down the service brake pedal
N and then move the travel direction selector from the parking position
to neutral/gear position. The event menu appears when you try to
release the parking brake without the service brake being pressed
down or when the brake pressure is too low, see Event menu release
the parking brake, description, page 84.
015430
R DANGER
or extreme danger!

4 Instruments and controls – Multi-function lever 55
4.5 Multi-function lever

General
This section describes the functions of the multi-function lever (position
2 2).
015221
Light control
With headlights on: On machines with LED type headlights, the control
has no effect on the headlights.
With headlights off: The multi-function lever is used as a headlamp

015433
flasher. Move the control upward for high beam flash, return is
automatic.
On machines with high and low beam, the multi-function lever is

used for changing between high and low beam. Move the control
upward to switch between full and low beam.
On machines with work lights on the frame, you can choose to

control the work lights on the frame with the light control (on in high
beam position).
Horn
Move the lever inwards towards the steering wheel for horn.
The horn can also be activated with the switch on the control lever,
015431
see Control lever (53), page 57.
Direction indicators
Move the lever backward or forward to indicate left and right travel
indication respectively.
015432

56 4 Instruments and controls – Load handling
4.6 Load handling

General
This section describes the functions of the control for load handling.
The control governs functions for handling boom and attachments. It
is possible to vary the speed of the different hydraulic functions by
varying the extent of lever deflection, i.e. lift and extension, etc. It is
also possible to vary the speed of the hydraulic functions with the
engine speed (rpm).
Boom and the attachment movements are dampened automatically

near the end positions.
Lowering speed is dampened automatically as the attachment

approaches a container.
NOTE
Position of a control is need-adapted and may thus differ from this
section. See the plates on the machine.
Right-hand control panel
A B The control panel to the right of the operator is adjustable in several

ways for optimum ergonomics.
1. Panel position is longitudinal.
Adjust the control panel to the desired position, see Switch for
length adjustment of the right-hand control panel (68), page 51.
2. Panel position is vertical.
Adjust the control panel to the desired position, see Switch for
height adjustment of the right-hand control panel (70), page 51.
016983
3. The angle of the rear section.

Pull the control (position A) upwards and adjust the panel manually
A. Control for adjusting the rear section to the desired position.
B. Control for adjusting the centre section 4. The angle of the centre section.
Pull the control (position B) upwards and adjust the panel manually
to the desired position.
5. The angle of the control lever's grip.
Contact service.

4 Instruments and controls – Control for load handling 57
4.6.1 Control for load handling

Control lever (53)
This section describes the functions of the control lever (position 53).
Some hydraulic functions are controlled by switches, see 4.3 Switches,
page 40.
It is possible to vary the speed of the different hydraulic functions, i.e.

lift, lower, etc, by varying the extent of the lever deflection. It is also
possible to vary the speed of the hydraulic functions with the engine
speed (rpm).
WARNING
In an emergency! In the event of undesired
activation/movement of a function.
Risk of personal injury and/or property damage!
IMMEDIATELY TURN OFF all working hydraulics by
pressing the CONTROL BREAKER for hydraulics.
NOTE
For hydraulic vertically adjustable cab: The doors must be closed
if the cab is raised (i.e. not fully lowered), otherwise the hydraulic
function for boom down is interrupted. Machine speed is limited
when the cab leaves the fully lowered position.
On machines with tool changer, the controls for spreading and

twistlocks have changed functions, depending on the lifting tool. See
the separate supplements for the lifting tool in question.

58 4 Instruments and controls – Control for load handling
Functions, control lever
Functions, control lever
62
Y+
X+ 53
b c
d
X- Y-
a
e
Y+
X+
016969
X- Y-
53. Lift, lower [Straight lift]/Boom in, boom out [Levelling ]

LIFT – pull the whole control lever backward (Y-). b. Side shift [Spreading] / Rotation [Tilt ]
SIDE SHIFT RIGHT - move the upper thumb control to
LOWER – move the whole control lever forward (Y+). the right (X+).
BOOM OUT – move the whole control lever to the right SIDE SHIFT LEFT - move the upper thumb control to
(X+). the left (X-).
BOOM IN – move the whole control lever to the left (X-). SPREADING OUT - press the shift key and move the
upper thumb control to the right (X+).
STRAIGHT LIFT UP – press the shift key and pull the
SPREADING IN - press the shift key and move the upper
whole
thumb control to the left (X-).
control lever backward (Y-).
ROTATION CLOCKWISE - pull the upper thumb control
STRAIGHT LIFT DOWN – press the shift key and move forward (Y+).
the whole
control lever forward (Y+). ROTATION ANTICLOCKWISE - move the upper thumb
control backward (Y-).
LEVELLING CLOCKWISE - press the shift key and TILT FORWARD – press the shift key and move the
move the whole control lever to the right (X+). upper thumb control forward (Y+).
LEVELLING ANTICLOCKWISE - press the shift key TILT BACKWARD – press the shift key and pull the
and upper thumb control backward (Y-).
pull the whole control lever to the left (X-).
c. Opening the twistlocks.
Speed varies with lever deflection and engine speed. Lower the attachment so that contact is obtained, and
a. Selecting direction of travel. The control is depress the button to open twistlocks.
spring-loaded, the current gear is shown in the display and d. Alternative function "Shift key". The switch changes the
the selected direction of travel is shown on the steering function of the other controls on the control lever.
wheel panel.
e. Tilt lock
Travel direction FORWARD - move the lower thumb
control forward. f. Levelling lock
Travel direction NEUTRAL – move the lower thumb 62. Horn.
control up or down.
Travel direction REVERSE - move the lower thumb control
backward.

4 Instruments and controls – Light panel on boom 59
4.6.2 Light panel on boom

Light panel on boom for top lift attachment
There is a light panel on the boom that is helpful when handling
A B C loads with the top lift attachment. The panel uses coloured lights to
indicate if and when twistlocks are locked/unlocked, that is, if the load
is secured/not secured.
A. Twistlocks locked (load secured), green.
B. Contact attachment's four corners, orange.
C. Twistlocks unlocked (load not secured), red.
D. Overheight legs raised, white.
NOTE
006497
D
The lights for load securing on the boom flash when there are
active fault codes on the sensors for load securing, which means
Light panel on boom, top lift attachment that the load securing functions are blocked.
On machines with tool changer, the lights have changed meanings

when the lifting tool is connected. There may also be other types of light
panels, depending on which lifting tools the tool changer is prepared
for. See the separate supplements for the lifting tool in question.
Light panel on boom for bottom lift attachment

There is a light panel on the boom that is helpful when handling loads
A B C with the bottom lift attachment. The panel uses coloured lights to
indicate if and when the legs have contact and clamping position, that
is, when the load is secured/not secured.
A. Twistlocks locked (load secured), green.
B. Contact attachment's four corners, orange.
C. Twistlocks unlocked (load not secured), red.
E H D. Contact left leg front, green.
E. Contact right leg front, green.
F. Contact left leg rear, green.
D I
G. Contact right leg rear, green.
H. Clamping position front leg pair, orange.
F K
I. Front leg pair raised, white.
000416
G J J. Clamping position rear leg pair, orange.

Light panel on boom, bottom lift attachment K. Front leg pair lowered, orange.
NOTE
When lifting, the lamps D, E, F and G must come on within 4
seconds, otherwise the lifting attempt is stopped. Lower the load.
The lamps D, E, F and G must be unactuated before a new lifting
attempt is started.
NOTE
that the load securing functions are blocked.

60 4 Instruments and controls – Pedals
4.7 Pedals
General
This section describes the machine's foot-operated functions.
NOTE
The default pedal height setting can be changed by adjusting the
angle of their console. The adjustment must be performed by a
service technician.
11
12 015214
11. Accelerator
12. Brake pedal
Accelerator (11)
The accelerator pedal (position 11) is electronic and controls the engine
speed via the CAN bus and the machine's control system.
Brake pedals (12)

The brake pedals (position 12) are hydraulic and connected to the
machine's hydraulic system. The brake pedals are used for service
brake.
The accumulator stores energy so that there is brake pressure even if

the engine stops. The event menu appears if the accumulator pressure
drops too low, see Event menu low accumulator pressure, description,
page 75.
The service brake is combined with declutching the transmission and

at a certain brake pressure the drive is fully declutched. The brake
pressure level is adjustable within specific minimum and maximum
values and adjustability is dependent on the machine model, contact
Cargotec service if values need to be adjusted.

4 Instruments and controls – Steering wheel 61
4.8 Steering wheel

General
This section describes controls for steering. The following alternatives
are available for steering the machine:
• adjustable steering wheel (position 3)
• joystick (position 13)
• mini steering wheel (position 13)
Steering wheel
Clockwise rotation of the steering wheel steers the machine to the
right, and vice versa.
The steering wheel's (position 3) inclination and height can be set to

the desired operating position.
1. Steering wheel angle in the longitudinal direction.
To adjust: Move the control on the steering column upward, angle
the steering wheel in the longitudinal direction and lock the control
when the steering wheel is in the desired position.
015216
2. Steering wheel angle in the lateral direction.

To adjust: To adjust: move the steering wheel's right-hand side
upward, angle the steering wheel sideways and lock the control
when the steering wheel is in the desired position.
3. Steering wheel's height.
To adjust: set the desired height with the Switch for height
adjustment of the steering wheel, see Switch for height adjustment
of steering wheel (69), page 51.
015217

62 4 Instruments and controls – Steering wheel
Mini steering wheel
3 Mini-steering wheel control is an electro-hydraulic system, mounted in

the left arm rest, to steer the machine with an ergonomically designed
2 rotating plate. Clockwise rotation of the steering wheel steers the
machine to the right, and vice versa. The wheels always follow the
1 position of the mini-steering wheel. If the steering wheel is released,
4
both the mini-steering wheel and the wheels remain in the set position.
5 The standard steering wheel is equipped with sensors that detect any
steering wheel movement in an emergency situation. If the operator
starts to steer using the standard steering wheel, the mini steering
wheel is disengaged.
1. Direction indicators.
2. Mini steering wheel.
The steering wheel's position on the arm rest is adjustable.
3. Switch for engaging the mini steering wheel.
Conditions: The speed must be below 3 km/h. If the speed
exceeds 3 km/h mini-steering wheel cannot be engaged.
6 NOTE
A sensor in the armrest mount on the driver's seat detects the
armrest angle. If the arm rest is angled upward, the mini steering
wheel function is deactivated at a certain angle and must be
activated again with the switch for engaging the mini steering wheel.
4. Travel direction selector F/N/R. The switch is spring-loaded, the

current gear is shown in the display and the selected direction of
travel is shown on the steering wheel panel.
Travel direction FORWARD – move the switch forward.
Travel direction NEUTRAL – move the switch up and down.
015422
Travel direction REVERSE – move the switch backward.

5. With headlights on: The switch is used to change between high
and low beam.
With headlights switched off: The switch is used for headlamp
flasher with high beam.
If the switch is held depressed for more than 2 seconds then
the windscreen and roof wipers are activated until the switch is
released.
6. Arm rest. Can be folded up to easily enter and leave the driver's
seat.

4 Instruments and controls – Steering wheel 63
Joystick control
1 2 3
4 Joystick control functions as the mini steering wheel, with the difference
that the mini steering wheel is replaced by a lever that is moved
left/right in order to steer the machine.
The standard steering wheel is equipped with sensors that detect any
steering wheel movement in an emergency situation. If the operator
starts to steer using the standard steering wheel, joystick steering is
5 disengaged.
1. Joystick.
2. Direction indicators.
016849
3. Travel direction selector F/N/R. The switch is spring-loaded, the
current gear is shown in the display and the selected direction of
travel is shown on the steering wheel panel.
Travel direction FORWARD – move the switch forward.
Travel direction NEUTRAL - move the switch right or left.
Travel direction REVERSE – move the switch backward.
4. With headlights on: The switch is used to change between high
and low beam.
With headlights switched off: The switch is used for headlamp
flasher with high beam.
If the switch is held depressed for more than 2 seconds then
the windscreen and roof wipers are activated until the switch is
released.
5. Switch for engaging the mini steering wheel.
Conditions: The speed must be below 3 km/h. If the speed
exceeds 3 km/h mini-steering wheel cannot be engaged.
NOTE
A sensor in the armrest mount on the driver's seat detects the
armrest angle. If the arm rest is angled upward, the mini steering
wheel function is deactivated at a certain angle and must be
activated again with the switch for engaging the mini steering wheel.

64 4 Instruments and controls – Steering wheel
Adjustment of the mini steering wheel/joystick

control
1. Adjusting the mini steering wheel longitudinally.
Adjust the mini steering wheel (position 1) to the desired position.
1
2. Adjusting the arm rest longitudinally.
To adjust: Loosen the knob (position 2) and adjust the arm rest to
the desired position. Lock the arm rest with the knob when the arm
rest is in the desired position.
015423
3. Height of the mini steering wheel/joystick control.

To adjust: Loosen the knob (position 3) and adjust the arm rest
to the desired position. Tighten the knob when the arm rest is in
the desired position.
4. Longitudinal angle of the mini steering wheel/joystick control.
To adjust: Loosen the Allen screw (position 4) and angle the
bracket for mini steering wheel/joystick control to the desired
position. Tighten the Allen screw when the bracket is in the desired
015424
position.
4
3
5. Sideways position of the mini steering wheel/joystick control.

To adjust: Loosen the Allen screw (position 5) and turn the arm
rest and bracket for the mini steering wheel/joystick control to the
desired position. Tighten the Allen screws when the armrest and
bracket are in the desired position.
015425

4 Instruments and controls – Driver's seat 65
4.9 Driver's seat

General
This section describes the driver's seat (position 10) in the cab.
Driver's seat
The driver's seat is equipped with several controls for adjustment as
11 follows (adjustment is easier when nobody is sitting in the seat):
1. Seat belt, 2-point.
Seat belt, 3-point .
2. Seat tilt.
3. Horizontal suspension .
4. Seat length.
10 5. Height of seat.
Mechanical elevation of seat height:
1
9 Turn the knob clockwise or anticlockwise until desired height is
obtained.
Air suspension elevation of seat height: .
2
Lift the control up to increase seat height or alternatively press the
8 control down to reduce seat height. The suspension automatically
responds to the weight of the operator.
3 An indicator shows green when the correct height is reached. The
7 indicator turns red when the seat's suspension is set outside the
comfort mode.
4 6. Distance to pedals.
Release the seat using the lever and move the seat forwards or
5 6 backwards.
7. Back rest angle.
Release the lock with the lever, set the desired tilt angle and
release the lever to lock in the desired position.
8. Adjusting arm rest, left .
9. Lower back (lumbar) support.
Turn knob until desired firmness in lumbar support is obtained.
017255
10. Seat heating .

11. Adjusting the head rest .
Driver's seat with adjustment possibilities

66 4 Instruments and controls – Heating / Air conditioning
4.10 Heating / Air conditioning

General information on air conditioning
This section describes the Air conditioning function, ECC.
38 39 40 43
The air conditioning system automatically regulates air flow and air
distribution in the cab and it constantly aims towards regulating the
37 temperature to a selected comfort level by heating or cooling the air in
the cab to the selected temperature.
36
The air conditioning system receives heat from the engine's cooling
system and provides heat when the engine is warm. Cooling
35 performance is generated by the cooling compressor (for ECC).
The system is controlled by fan, heat and air distribution as well as

012820
function for recirculation and defroster:
41 42 44 45 46 • Automatic control of the fan speed, temperature control and air
distribution in the cab is activated by switch (position 39). With
Panel for heating and air conditioning system AUTO mode enabled, the control system attempts to maintain
the temperature selected on the display. Both fan speed and
temperature control are automatic.
• Heat (and cooling performance for ECC) is controlled
with temperature switches (position 41, 42). Cooling is
activated/deactivated with the switch for cooling (position 43).
When adjusting the temperature the event menu appears on the
display, Event menu raise/lower cab temperature, description,
page 85.
• If necessary, the airflow can be adjusted manually with the switch
for the fan (position 38, 40). When adjusting the fan speed the
event menu appears on the display, Event menu raise/lower fan
speed, description, page 85.
• If necessary, the air distribution can be adjusted manually with the
switch for the air distribution (position 44, 45, 46). The fresh air
intake is equipped with a fine filter. Filter replacement is indicated
on the display by a filter monitor.
NOTE
Filter replacement is first indicated in the event of high fan capacity
use.
• If necessary, the recirculation of cab air can be activated/deactivated

with the switch for recirculation (position 36).
• Defroster for fast demisting of windows is activated/deactivated
with the switch for defroster (position 37).
• The pause heater is activated/deactivated with the pause heater
switch (position 35) .
NOTE
Operator's door and windows shall be closed for satisfactory
function of the system.
A short while after one of the doors has been opened, the fan is
switched off. After an additional period the air conditioning system's
cooling compressor shuts off (cooling function and air- drying
015218
stops). Close the door and the cooling compressor and fan are
activated again. The function can be turned off via the machine's
settings in the service menus.
Fresh air inlet for cab The current settings for the heating/air conditioning system are shown
in the display.
For information on the switches, see 4.3 Switches, page 40.
For information on the display, see 4.11 Control system, page 68.

4 Instruments and controls – Heating / Air conditioning 67
Diesel heater
A B C As an option the machine can be equipped with diesel heater for

D heating the cab and the engine without the engine being started. The
D diesel heater heats and circulates the engine's coolant. The diesel
heater is controlled by a separate timer, with the display mounted on
Mo
Tu
We the panel below the rear window on the left-hand side of the cab.
Th
Fr
Sa
Operating hours and up to three start times can be set using the timer.
Su
O E
K
When the coolant has reached the required temperature, the cab fan is
017917
activated in order to heat the cab. If the battery voltage becomes too
G F low then the heater is switched off automatically.
A. Application bar
For setting the diesel heater's timer, see Setting the diesel heater, page
B. Menu bar 152.
C. Message field
D. Selection front / rear
E. OK
F. Status bar
G. Off / On

68 4 Instruments and controls – Control system
4.11 Control system

General
This section describes the control system (position 71) and the
information that can be obtained from the operating menus (position 5).
a
The machine is equipped with an electronic system for control and
monitoring of the machine's different functions.
The system gives the operator information in the form of:

• Error code information
10:23 2
0
10 20 Three levels of error code information can be shown. In the event
22
rpm x 100
of a new error code, error code information is shown over the
entire display. See 5.3 Error codes, page 97.
21° 18
99999
km/ h • Operating information
Pwr/ No r/ ECO Operating information includes, for example, machine speed,
16.7 t engine rpm, fuel level, etc.
D U
• Event-controlled information
Event-controlled information is, e.g. contact and overload.
Event-controlled information is, e.g. contact and overload.
Information is presented on the display (position a). The function keys

(position c-e) are used to navigate the display menus and confirm
b c d e selections. Figures are stated with example data.
c e The information in the display can be selected to show values with
metric (SI) or imperial (US) units, see Setting the unit, page 177.
017922v
d
a. Display
b. Pop-up for button function
c. Enter/YES/Save
d. Navigate through menus/adjust values with the
wheel or buttons , , or
e. Exit/NO

4 Instruments and controls – Control system 69
Description
The loop for the operating menus is described in this section.
1
10:23 2
10 20
0 22
10:23 rpm x 1 0 0 10:23 2
1756 r pm
9
0
21 ° 18
99999
km / h
32 . 8
26 . 1
l/h
l/h
9. 5
20. 2
km/ h
km/ h
2
Pwr/ No r/ ECO 74. 8 km
0
16 . 7 t
D U
12 0 : 36 h 1 23 1 44 3 2
0
10: 23 12 : 5 9 p m
1 23 1 234 7 6 pcs 80° C 5. 0 ba r

8 1 23 2 234 7 6 pcs 3
1 23
1 234 7 6 pcs
234 7 6 pcs 100%

1 23
2
0:00pm 0 : 00 p m
7.8t 7 5° C 5 0%
7 4
3.6m
5 0° C 50° C
0:00pm 10:23
-1.9 t
6 5
74.9 t
28. 0V
522.9 t
017923
Example of operating menus 5. Operating menu electrical system
1. Operating menu 6. Operating menu scales
2. Operating menu trip computer work shift 7. Operating menu load centre
3. Engine operating menu 8. Operating menu load counter and extra functions
4. Transmission and hydraulics operating menu 9. Operating menu customer settings

70 4 Instruments and controls – Operating menus
4.11.1 Operating menus

Description
10:23 2 g After starting the machine the operating menu is displayed with engine
a
speed, speed, time, fuel level and information on the current setting for
b 0
10 20
22
h the heating or air conditioning system.
rpm x 100
c a. Time.
i
d
21° 18
99 9 9 9
km / h
k
j
b. Field for the four event menus with the highest priority and which
have status indicators. When there are only up to two event menus
with status indicators, status for heating or air conditioning is
shown in the lower part of the field.
e Pwr/ No r/ ECO
1 6. 7 t c. Fuel economy. The green field indicates economical driving while

l
017924
f D U the red field indicates uneconomical driving that consumes a lot
of fuel.
d. Speed in km/h.
e. Eco Drive Mode setting. Eco Drive Mode, page 141. Selected
mode has white text, the row is only shown on machines with Eco
Drive Mode.
f. Fuel level.
g. Current gear.
In the event of a fault in the transmission, this is indicated with gear
number between 10-15, which corresponds to the current gear +
10. Contact service for troubleshooting.
h. Engine speed.
i. Utilised load capacity, the bar shows load 0-100%.
j. Operating time in hours (h).
k. AdBlue level (only applies to specific engine alternatives).
l. Scales, current weight in tonnes or lbs (pounds).
4.11.1.1 Operating menu trip computer work shift
Operating menu trip computer work shift, description
2
Trip computer for work shift shows current work shift machine statistics
10:23
since last reset to zero.
a 1756 rpm
d a. Instantaneous fuel consumption in litres per hour.
32.8 l/h
9.5 km/h e b. Average fuel consumption, in litres per hour.
b 20.2 km/h f c. Estimated operating hours to empty tank in hours and minutes.
26.1 l/h
74.8 km g d. Current engine speed in revolutions per minute.
c e. Current speed in km/h.

120:36 h 1 23 14432 h
f. Average speed in km/h.
016367
g. Driving distance in kilometres.

h. Number of lifts.
Trip computer work shift is reset automatically if the machine has been
switched off for longer than two hours or manually with .

4 Instruments and controls – Operating menus 71
4.11.1.2 Engine operating menu

Engine operating menu, description
12 : 5 9 pm
a. Shows current engine coolant temperature in °C or °F.
a b b. Shows current engine oil pressure in bar or psi.
c. Only available on Volvo engine alternative.
80°C 5. 0 b a r Shows the engine's oil level in percent.
100%
016371
4.11.1.3 Transmission and hydraulics operating menu
Transmission and hydraulics operating menu,
description
0:00pm
a. Shows the current transmission oil temperature in °C or °F.
a b. Shows the current hydraulic system oil temperature in °C or °F.
c. Shows the current brake system oil temperature in °C or °F.
75° C 50%
b c
50° C 50° C
016372
4.11.1.4 Operating menu electrical system

Operating menu electrical system, description
10:23
a. Shows the current battery voltage in volts.
28.0V
014521
4.11.1.5 Operating menu scales

Operating menu scale, description
a. Displays the tare in tonnes or lbs (pounds).
0:00pm
Tare weight is the change in weight in relation to the last reset of
the tare weight. This can be used to weigh the load in a container.
If the tare weight is reset to zero with an empty container then the
-1. 9 t a tare weight shows the weight of the load in the container.
b. Current weight in tonnes or lbs (pounds) (net weight).
74. 9 t b c. Total weight in tonnes or lbs (pounds) (gross weight).
522 . 9 t c To operate the scales, see Scales, page 166.

016370

72 4 Instruments and controls – Operating menus
4.11.1.6 Operating menu load counter
Operating menu load counter, description
10:23
a. Number of lifts counter 1, (top lift or tool changer)
b. Number of lifts counter 2, (top lift or tool changer)
c. Number of lifts counter 1, (bottom lift or OHC)
1 23 1 234 7 6 pcs a
d. Number of lifts counter 2, (bottom lift or OHC)
1 23 2 234 7 6 pcs b
To reset the load counter, see Load counter, page 174.
1 23
1 234 7 6 pcs c
1 23
2 234 7 6 pcs d
016384
4.11.1.7 Operating menu load centre monitoring
Operating menu load centre monitoring
0:00pm
a. Shows current weight in tonnes or lbs (pounds).
b. Shows load centre distance from front wheels in metres or inches.
c. Shows how much of the machine's capacity is being used for the
a 7.8t current load and load centre distance.
c
b 3.6m
017810
4.11.1.8 Operating menu tyre pressure monitoring
Operating menu tyre pressure, description
0:00pm
bar
c Operating menu tyre pressure shows the current pressure in the tyres
10.0
and, together with the event menus, warns of low tyre pressure in two
a 8.9 9.9
stages with a coloured frame around the tyre in question.
d
a. Shows the air pressure in the left-hand steering wheel in bar or psi.
e b. Shows the air pressure in the right-hand steering wheel in bar or
b 7.4 10.0 psi.
10.1 f c. Shows the air pressure in the left-hand outer drive wheel in bar
017497
or psi.
d. Shows the air pressure in the left-hand inner drive wheel in bar
or psi.
e. Shows the air pressure in the right-hand inner drive wheel in bar
or psi.
f. Shows the air pressure in the right-hand outer drive wheel in bar
or psi.
Green frame indicates that the tyre pressure is approved.
Yellow frame indicates low pressure and activates the event menu, see
Event menu tyre pressure, description, page 79.
Red frame indicates tyre pressure too low and activates the event
menu, see Event menu low tyre pressure, description, page 75.

4 Instruments and controls – Operating menus 73
4.11.1.9 Operating menu customer settings
Operating menu customer settings, description

a. Number of active error codes with error code level stop.
10:23 h
b. Number of active error codes with error code level warning.
a c. Number of active error codes with error code level information.
0
d. Menu for setting customer-specific settings for date and time,
b i SI/US units, Eco Drive Mode, automatic start and stop function
and language.
0
e. Menu for statistics, history and operating hours.
c f. Menu for services and settings.
0
g. Menu for machine check.
016374
h. Menu for active error codes.
d e f g
i. Menu for inactive error codes.
For a more detailed description of the different submenus, see 5.6

Customer settings via display, page 175.

74 4 Instruments and controls – Event menus
4.11.2 Event menus

General
Event menu categories
10:23 The control system attracts the operator's attention to important

information by showing the event menus on the control system display.
a The event menus are divided into the categories: STOP, WARNING,
INFO and NOTICE. Each menu is displayed with an icon with a border
b around it. The severity of the menu is indicated by the colour of the
border around the function symbol.
Some event menus give an audio signal to attract the operator's

attention.
014952
Table Event menu categories
Example figure STOP Red border.
a. The colour of the border indicates the category
of the event menu. WARNING Yellow border.
b. Symbol for the current function. INFO Grey border.

NOTICE No border.
Event menus with the level STOP, WARNING and INFO menus can
be acknowledged with otherwise they automatically disappear
when the state that generated the event ends. Event menus with
the level NOTICE automatically disappear. Menus that have been
acknowledged can be displayed with the current symbols in the status
field to the left. The event menus are ranked according to a priority
order in which those with the highest priority are displayed in the status
field. Not all event menus have status indicators and no icon will appear
in the status field for these. If there are more than four active event
menus, those with the highest priority are displayed, yet all menus
with status indicators are placed in a queue and are displayed when
there is space in the status field. If there is space in the status field,
information for the heating or air conditioning system will be shown in
the lower part of the field.
How each event menu affects the machine's different functions is

described under each event menu.

4 Instruments and controls – Event menus 75
4.11.2.1 Event menu brake temperature
Event menu brake temperature, description

The figure is shown if:
• the temperature of the brakes is too high.
The machine's speed is limited for safety reasons when the
temperature is too high.
If the figure is shown, let the machine idle until the brake temperature
has reached the normal level. The display then disappears. The
display can be removed with the function key .
014984
4.11.2.2 Event menu low accumulator pressure
Event menu low accumulator pressure, description

• The hydraulic oil pressure in the brake system is too low. The red
border is not displayed for a specific time during startup when the
pressure is being built up. The current pressure is shown in the
menu.
The event menu disappears when the hydraulic oil pressure has
reached the right level. The display can be removed with the function
015440
key .
4.11.2.3 Event menu low tyre pressure
Event menu low tyre pressure, description

bar • The tyre pressure becomes too low. Current tyre pressure for all
10.0 tyres is shown in the menu, a tyre with pressure too low has a
9.9 9.9 red frame in the menu.
If the figure is shown (and speed limitation occurs):

• Set down the load in a safe manner and immediately call a service
7.0 10.0 technician to check the tyre pressures.
017951
10.1
WARNING
Incorrect tyre pressure means that the stability of the
machine is reduced.
Never lift a load with a machine with incorrect tyre
pressure.
The event menu disappears when the tyre pressure has reached the
correct level. The display can be removed with the function key .

4.11.2.4 Event menu overload
Event menu overload, description

The figure is shown when:
• The load on the steering axle is too low. The lifting capacity has
reached 100% in accordance with the load curve for the machine.
• Boom movement is limited because lifting capacity has reached
100% in accordance with the load curve for the machine.
Only boom in is permitted.
• The load in accordance with the load curve without support jacks
016335
has been exceeded, during an attempt to raise the support jacks.
In the event that the image is shown, the machine's load functions
are limited:
• Retract the boom to reduce the risk of tipping. The display then
disappears.
In an emergency situation, the safety system bypass switch
(position 47) can be used to lower the load.
WARNING
Safety features are blocked.
No safety system is engaged! Risk of roll-over and
tipping over!
Only use bypass in emergency situations!
• On a machine with support jacks, lower the support jacks to

increase the load capacity of the machine and attempt to lift again.
4.11.2.5 Event menu overload steering axle
Event menu overload steering axle, description

Too high a load on the steering axle involves reduced lateral stability
during operation and a risk of damage to the steering axle's tyres and
rims.

• Machine speed is limited so that the load on the steering axle
reaches the limit.
Permissible speed is dependent on the current steering axle load;
016336
speed is limited dynamically depending on axle weight on the

steering axle.

• Lower the attachment (to reduce boom angle). The display then
disappears.
• Move load or attachment forward to reduce pressure on the
steering axle. The display then disappears.
• Reduce speed. The display then disappears.
NOTE
In the event of high load on the steering axle, wear on steering axle
and tyres is high and lateral stability is also lower.
The display can be removed with the function key .

4.11.2.6 Event menu overload drive axle
Event menu overload drive axle, description

Too high a load on the drive axle involves a risk of damage to the drive
axle's tyres and rims.

• Machine speed is limited so that the load on the drive axle reaches
the limit.
Permissible speed is dependent on the current drive axle load;
speed is limited dynamically depending on axle weight on the
017817
drive axle.

• Operate the load to operating position. The display then
disappears.
• Slide the load or attachment back in order to reduce pressure on
the drive axle. The display then disappears.
• Reduce speed. The display then disappears.
4.11.2.7 The event menu parking brake not activated

and no operator in the driver's seat
The event menu parking brake not activated and no

operator in the driver's seat, description
• The parking brake is not activated and the operator is not sitting
in the driver's seat.
The event menu disappears when the operator sits in the driver's seat,
or when the parking brake is activated. The display can be removed
with the function key .
015441
4.11.2.8 Event menu engine coolant temperature
Event menu engine coolant temperature, description

• The coolant temperature is high.
If the figure is shown, let the machine idle until the coolant temperature
has reached the normal level. The display then disappears. The
014987

4.11.2.9 Event menu oil temperature transmission
Event menu oil temperature transmission, description

• Transmission oil temperature is high.
If the figure is shown, let the machine stand and idle until the
transmission oil has reached the normal temperature. The display then
disappears. The display can be removed with the function key .
014988
4.11.2.10 Event menu height limitation
Event menu height limitation, description

• Set maximum lifting height is reached. The machine's current
height is shown in the display.
If the figure is shown, lower or retract the boom. The display then
disappears. The function can be by-passed, see Height limitation,
016337
page 173.
XX m
4.11.2.11 Event menu support jacks
Event menu support jacks, description

• Support jacks are not in fully raised or lowered position (moving).
When the support jacks are not fully raised, the transmission is
locked in neutral position.
On machines set for automatic lowering/raising of the support
jacks, "AUTO" is shown together with the symbol on the display
016333
when the support jacks are lowered/raised down or up.
In the event that the image is shown, operate the support jacks up or
down, see Support jacks, page 170.
4.11.2.12 Event menu oil temperature hydraulics
Event menu oil temperature hydraulics, description

• The hydraulic system's oil temperature is high.
If the figure is shown, let the machine stand and idle until the hydraulic
oil has reached the normal temperature. The display then disappears.
015479

4.11.2.13 Event menu AdBlue end
Event menu AdBlue end, description

Only applies to Volvo TAD1360VE.

• Engine does not receive AdBlue.
• The level in the AdBlue tank is low.
Emission is control not working and engine power is limited.
016679
If the figure is shown, top up the AdBlue. The display then disappears.
4.11.2.14 Event menu tyre pressure
Event menu tyre pressure, description

bar • The tyre pressure becomes low. Current tyre pressure for all tyres
10.0 is shown in the menu, a tyre with low pressure has a yellow frame
9.9 9.9 in the menu.
In case the figure is shown:

• Finish the work shift and call a service technician as soon as
8.4 10.0 possible to check the tyre pressures.
017952
10.1
WARNING
Incorrect tyre pressure means that the stability of the
machine is reduced.
Never lift a load with a machine with incorrect tyre
pressure.
The event menu disappears when the tyre pressure has reached the
correct level. The display can be removed with the function key .
4.11.2.15 Event menu low accumulator pressure
Event menu low accumulator pressure, description

• Try to release the parking brake when the accumulator pressure
is low.
If the figure is shown, wait until the pressure is built up in the

accumulators and release the parking brake. The display then
016341

4.11.2.16 Event menu parking brake
Event menu parking brake, description

• The parking brake is activated and you try to engage a gear.
• The parking brake is activated and you try to activate the automatic
functions that require the parking brake to be released.
Release the parking brake and the display disappears. The display can
be removed with the function key .
014990
4.11.2.17 Event menu low AdBlue level
Event menu low AdBlue level, description

Only applies to Volvo TAD1360VE.

• The level in the AdBlue tank is low.
If the figure is shown, top up the AdBlue. The display then disappears.
014991
4.11.2.18 Event menu low fuel level
Event menu low fuel level, description

• The level in the fuel tank is low.
If the figure is shown, top up the fuel. The display then disappears. The
014992
4.11.2.19 Event menu no operator in seat
Event menu no operator in seat, description

The figure is shown with:
• Attempt to engage a gear without anyone sitting in the driver's
seat. The transmission then goes to neutral and the gear must be
engaged again once the operator sits in the seat again.
• The working hydraulics are activated without anyone sitting in the
driver's seat.
If the figure is shown, sit down in the seat and select the gear again
014994
to activate the working hydraulics. The display then disappears. The


4.11.2.20 Event menu open door
Event menu open door, description

• A function is limited because the door(s) is/are not closed.
In the event that the display is shown, close the door(s). The display
then disappears. The display can be removed with the function key .
015206
4.11.2.21 Event menu automatic spreading 20'–40'
Event menu automatic spreading 20'–40', description

• Automatic spreading of attachment 20' to 40' in progress. To stop
an ongoing automatic 20' to 40' spreading, activate spreading in or
out of with the control lever. The display then disappears.

016349
4.11.2.22 Event menu tilt lock
Event menu tilt lock, description
With tilt lock it is not advisable to operate the machine at speeds faster
than 5 km/h. This is because it results in increased wear. Therefore,
the control and monitoring system limits the machine's speed.

• Machine speed is limited due to the tilt lock function being active.
016342

• Reduce speed to below 5 km/h.
• Disengage the lock function, the speed limitation and display are
then discontinued. The lock function is handled by the control lever
(position 57), see Control lever (53), page 57.

4.11.2.23 Event menu levelling lock
Event menu levelling lock, description
With levelling lock it is not advisable to operate the machine at speeds

faster than 5 km/h. This is because it results in increased wear.
Therefore, the control and monitoring system limits the machine's
speed.
016343
• Machine speed is limited due to the levelling lock function being
active.

• Reduce speed to below 5 km/h. The display then disappears.
• Disengage the lock function, the speed limitation and display are
then discontinued. The lock function is handled by the control lever
(position 57), see Control lever (53), page 57.
4.11.2.24 Event menu rotation stop
Event menu rotation stop, description

• Rotation of attachment reaches permitted rotation limit ±25° from
straight position when the rotation stop function is active.
If the figure is shown (and speed limitation engages), turn the

attachment toward straight position. The display then disappears. The
016347
function can be bypassed, see Rotation stop, page 167.
4.11.2.25 Event menu contact
Event menu contact top-lift attachment, description

• One to three corners of the attachment are in contact with the load
during contact. The lift corners which are in contact are filled in.
I.e. when the twistlock ends up in open or closed position.
When all four corners are in contact the display figure disappears
and the load can be locked.
In the event that the image is shown, operate the attachment until full
016350
contact is achieved. Load cannot be secured (lock twistlocks) before

full contact. The load can be locked when all four corner points have
contact. The display then disappears.

Event menu contact combi attachment, description

• One to seven sensors on the attachment have contact.
When the correct contact is made and clamping mode is active,
the display disappears and the load can be lifted.
Filled triangle means that the lift leg has reached clamping position.
017398
Filled circle means that the lift leg has contact.
In the event that the image is shown, operate the attachment's legs so
that all legs have clamping position and so that full contact is achieved.
You cannot lift the load until this has happened. The load can be
clamped and lifted when all four lift corners have contact. During lifting,
full contact must be achieved within 4 seconds, otherwise the lifting
attempt is interrupted. The display then disappears.
NOTE
When transporting loads with bottom lift attachment, machine
speed is limited to max. second gear and 10 km/h.
4.11.2.26 Event menu twistlocks
Event menu twistlocks, description

• The sensors for twistlocks cannot detect if twistlocks are in locked
or unlocked position. Figure is shown during lift.
When all sensors have contact, the display figure disappears.

• Operate attachment until full contact is obtained and twistlocks are
in correct position. The display then disappears.
016344
• Open and lock twistlocks (use switch for by-pass of safety system
(position 47) if necessary). The display then disappears.
4.11.2.27 Event menu low washer fluid level
Event menu low washer fluid level, description

• The level in the washer fluid reservoir is low.
If the figure is shown, top up the washer fluid. The display then
015205

4.11.2.28 Event menu air filter air conditioning system
Event menu air filter air conditioning system,

description
• The air filter in the air-conditioning system is clogged.
If the figure is shown, replace the air filter. The display then disappears.
015442
4.11.2.29 Event menu arm rest
Event menu arm rest, description
The image is shown if the left-hand arm rest is not in lowered position
on activation of mini wheel/joystick control.
In the event that the image is shown, lower the arm rest and try again
to activate mini-wheel/joystick control. This clears the display. The
016610
4.11.2.30 Event menu seat belt
Event menu seat belt, description

• The belt is not fastened and the speed exceeds 3 km/h
If the figure is shown, fasten the seat belt. The display then disappears.
016369
4.11.2.31 Event menu release the parking brake
Event menu release the parking brake, description

• Attempt to release the parking brake is made without the service
brake pedal being pressed down.
If the figure is shown, press down the service brake pedal and release
the parking brake. The display then disappears. The display can be
removed with the function key .
014995

4.11.2.32 Event menu preheating
Event menu preheating, description

• Preheating is activated.
The engine's control system activates the preheating during a time
period as necessary.
Engine alternative Cummins QSM11 has automatic preheating
without indicator to the operator.
The event menu disappears when preheating is complete. The display
014997
can be removed with the function key .
4.11.2.33 Event menu raise/lower cab temperature
Event menu raise/lower cab temperature, description

• The cab temperature is raised or lowered. The desired temperature
is displayed in the menu.
The event menu disappears a short time after the most recent
temperature change with the cab temperature switches. The display
18.6°
017813
4.11.2.34 Event menu raise/lower fan speed
Event menu raise/lower fan speed, description

• The fan speed is raised or lowered.
The event menu disappears a short time after the last fan change
with the switches for fan speed. The display can be removed with the
function key .
014999
4.11.2.35 Event menu start interlock
Event menu start interlock, description

• The start interlock (Immobiliser) function prevents the operator
from staring the engine, e.g. with the alcolock.
• The starter motor has run too long. The engine's control unit stops
the starting attempt. A new attempt to start the engine can be
made when the starter has rested for a while. Applies to Cummins
Stage 3B/Tier 4i.
• Engine or hydraulic oil heater is engaged.
015200
The event menu disappears when the conditions for starting the
machine are met. The display can be removed with the function key .

4.11.2.36 Event menu heating rear view mirrors/rear

windscreen
Event menu heating rear view mirrors/rear windscreen,

description

• Heating in rear window is activated.
• Heating rear view mirrors/rear windscreen activated.
The event menu disappears a short time after activation. The display
015201

• Heating in rear window is deactivated.
• Heating rear view mirrors/rear windscreen deactivated.
The event menu disappears a short time after the function is

deactivated. The display can be removed with the function key .
015202
4.11.2.37 Event menu service
Event menu service, description

• Time for the next service approaches. Time remaining to service
123 in hours is shown in the menu.
Ensure that the machine is serviced according to the prescribed

intervals. The display can be removed with the function key .
017812
4.11.2.38 Event menu control breaker
Event menu control breaker, description

• The control breaker is pressed in when specific functions are
activated.
• The control breaker is activated.
Reset the control breaker by turning it clockwise. The display can be

removed with the function key .
015444

4.11.2.39 Event menu intermittent wiper
Event menu intermittent wiper, description

• Slow intermittent wipers are activated.
015445
• Fast intermittent wipers are activated.

015446
4.11.2.40 Event menu speed limitation
Event menu speed limitation, description

• Functions in the machine are prevented because the speed is too
high.
If the figure is shown, reduce speed. The display then disappears.

016346
4.11.2.41 Event menu battery charging
Event menu battery charging, description

• The engine's alternator does not charge the battery for a few
seconds.
If the figure is shown, increase the engine speed in order to increase

alternator output. The display disappears after 2 seconds when the
alternator is charging the battery. If the display does not disappear,
release the load safely, park the machine and contact service.
016352

4.11.2.42 Event menu low coolant level engine
Event menu low coolant level engine, description

• The coolant level in the engine's expansion tank becomes too low.
If the figure is shown, release the load safely, park the machine and
check the coolant level, see Cooling system, general, page 202.
016368
4.11.2.43 Event menu load centre
Event menu load centre, description

• Lift or extension functions are active; the menu is a means for
preventing unpermitted load cases during load handling.
7.8t
Use the information to position the load in a way that minimises loading.

3.6m
017811
4.11.2.44 Event menu automatic stop function
Event menu automatic stop function, description

The image is shown before:
• The engine is stopped by automatic engine shutdown, see
Automatic stop function, page 139.
• The engine is stopped by the automatic start and stop function, see
Automatic start and stop function, page 140.
The bar indicates remaining time until shutdown as a % of set time for
automatic shutdown.
017366
4.11.2.45 Event menu automatic start function
Event menu automatic start function, description

• The engine is ready to be started automatically by the automatic
start/stop function, see Automatic start and stop function, page 140.
To start the engine, activate any hydraulic function, depress the

accelerator pedal or depress the brake pedal.
017365

4 Instruments and controls – Optional equipment 89
4.12 Optional equipment

Back-up camera and distance warning
General
As an option, the machine can be equipped with back-up camera.

There are two different systems with back-up camera.
• Back-up camera.
• Back-up camera with distance warning.
Back-up camera
The back-up camera is fitted in a recess in the counterweight and

the image is shown on a monitor in the cab. The monitor is fitted
on a hinged bracket to the right, in front of the door in the cab. The
back-up camera has a microphone, the audio is played back using a
loudspeaker in the monitor. Volume is adjusted using the Right and
Left buttons on the monitor (position A). Monitor brightness is adjusted
automatically to the light in the cab with the light sensor (position F).
Lines are shown above the camera image to help judge the distance to
A objects in the image.
B
017918
D C
F E
The monitor can also be mounted on the left-hand side, in front of the
Monitor back-up camera door .
A. Right / Left (volume)
The machine can be equipped with several cameras, such as for
B. Up / Down monitoring in front of the machine . Selection of camera display is
C. Off / On made via the Confirm selection button on the monitor (position D),
the back-up camera is automatically selected when reverse gear is
D. Confirm selection (change camera)
activated.
E. Show menu
More settings are available via the monitor's built-in menu system that
F. Light sensor
is shown with the Show menu button (position E). To navigate in the
menus, use the arrow keys (position A and B) and the button Confirm
selection (position D).

90 4 Instruments and controls – Back-up camera and distance warning
Back-up camera with distance warning
A B C
The back-up camera with distance warning uses the camera to show
the area behind the machine and ultrasonic sensors to warn of objects
in the area behind the machine. The distance warning system is only
F1 active when reverse gear is selected.
F2
D The back-up camera is fitted in a recess in the counterweight and the

F3
image is shown on a monitor in the cab. The monitor is fitted on a
F4 hinged bracket to the right, in front of the door in the cab. The camera
has a microphone, the audio is played back using a loudspeaker in the
monitor. The monitor has four programmable shortcut buttons (position
D), the function of the buttons can be set using the menu system in
the monitor.
G 017933
F E
The sensors for distance warning are located on each side of the rear
A. Screen display off / on counterweight. When objects are detected by the sensors the operator
is warned by coloured bars on the right-hand side of the monitor as well
B. Indicator light, power
as by acoustic warnings (see below).
C. Light sensor
The monitor can also be mounted on the left-hand side, in front of the
D. Shortcuts 1 - 4
door .
E. Cancel
F. Menu navigation More settings are available via the monitor's built-in menu system that
is shown when the Menu navigation button (position F) is pressed up
G. Confirm selection or down. To navigate in the menus, use the Menu navigation button
(position F) and confirm a selection by pressing the Confirm selection
button (position D), undo a selection or exit the menus by pressing the
Cancel button (position E).

4 Instruments and controls – Back-up camera and distance warning 91
Distance warning
Distance warning
A
Back-up camera with distance warning works in the same way as
B the normal back-up camera but with the addition that it also warns of
STOP objects behind the machine.
C
NOTE
The distance warning system should be seen as an aid when
D driving at low speed. Always have a clear view of the area behind
the machine; personnel or other vehicles may enter the area behind
the machine.
Distance warning takes place in four stages with audio and visual
017916
indication on the monitor.
A. Distance warning stage 1 and 2 Stage 1:

B. Distance warning stage 3 • No objects within 3 metres behind the machine.
C. Distance warning stage 4 • Green constant indicator to the right of the monitor (position A).
D. Distance warning stage 4 Stage 2:
• Object within 3.0 - 1.7 metres behind the machine.
• Yellow flashing indicator to the right of the monitor (position A) and
warning sound twice per second.
Stage 3:
• Object within 1.7 - 0.7 metres behind the machine.
• Red flashing indicator to the right of the monitor (position B) and
warning sound four times per second.
Stage 4:
• Object within 0.7 metres behind the machine or at the sides.
• Red constant indicator to the right of the monitor (position C), stop
symbol above image and constant warning sound.

92 5 Handling
5 Handling
General
The machine is intended to be used in the way that is described in
the operator's manual. If the machine is used in any other way or in
potentially dangerous environments, e.g. an explosive environment,
then special safety rules must be followed and the machine must be
equipped for such an environment.
NOTE
It is the operator who is responsible for ensuring that the machine
comes in for service according to prescribed service intervals.
Procedures are described in the maintenance manual.
The information in the chapter for handling the machine does not
relieve the operator of the responsibility of following laws or other
national regulations for road safety and work safety.
Awareness, alertness, good judgement and respect for governing

safety regulations are prerequisites for avoiding accident risks.
Environmental impact
It is important that the machine is used in a way that results in minimal
environmental impact with regards to fuel consumption, exhausts, and
noise emissions. Therefore, keep the following in mind:
• Plan the work and optimise machine use.
• Avoid operating with full throttle when transporting.
• Do not rev the engine unnecessarily when load handling.
• Optimise operation with regard to acceleration and braking.
• Minimise the time the machine runs at idling speed. Do not allow
the machine to idle when there is a break in the work.

5 Handling – Handling 93
Emergency equipment
The following emergency equipment is available on the machine:
• Emergency exit from cab, right-hand door.
In an emergency:
1. Open the emergency exit right-hand door with handle on
inside.
2. Machine with hydraulic cab movement:
In the event that the doors are blocked, break the rear window
with the emergency hammer.
015599
Emergency hammer
34 • Control breaker for load handling.

In an emergency:
1. Press down the control breaker for hydraulics (position 34)
immediately.
All load handling functions stop and the transmission is set
in neutral position.
2. Restore control breaker (turn clockwise).
012702
• Emergency lowering valve (For vertically adjustable cab)

If the cab should jam in the raised position, it can be lowered
manually with an emergency lowering valve (position A). This is
fitted on the control valve for cab movement on the right-hand
frame member, level with the cab's mast, see Hydraulic vertically
adjustable cab, page 172.
1. Check that the lock for securing the cab in raised position does
not block cab lowering.
2. Open the emergency lowering valve. The cab lowers.
3. Close the emergency lowering valve.
016944
Emergency lowering valve, cab lift

94 5 Handling – Handling
• Manual movement of the cab with hydraulic movement.

A If necessary, the hydraulic motor for hydraulic cab movement can
be disengaged so that the cab can be slid manually when the
engine has stopped.
1. Switch off the engine and park the machine.
2. Remove the protective cover over the engine's gears.
3. Remove the three screws (position A) on the gear and slide
the cab by hand.
DANGER
The cab is very heavy and the machine must not be
015583
moved without first securing the cab.
Extreme danger! Risk of crushing!
A. Screws for releasing the hydraulic motor for Fit the screws on the gear for the sliding cab's
hydraulic sliding cab hydraulic motor and the protective cover before
starting to operate.
4. Reset by sliding the cab so that the screws can be fitted; fit
the three screws.
5. Fit the protective cover.
• Ladder on cab frame

For situations where the cab must be evacuated and it is not
possible to lower the cab then there is a ladder on the left-hand
side of the cab frame to evacuate the cab.
1. Try to get help to lower the cab manually with the emergency
lowering valve.
2. In the event that the left-hand door is blocked by the
mechanical lock, break the rear window with the emergency
hammer.
3. Use the ladder to climb down.
• Fire extinguisher
Located within easy reach!
017929
Ladder for evacuation of raised cab

5 Handling – Running-in 95
5.1 Running-in
General
The machine should be operated with great care during the running-in
period. The intention is to considerably increase the service life of
the machine.
Recommended running-in period is 10 hours of operating time. This

results in fewer malfunctions.
Engine
The oil and filer must be changed according to intervals described in
the maintenance manual.
Transmission
The oil and filer must be changed according to intervals described in
the maintenance manual.
Tyres and rims

For a new machine it is extremely important that the wheel nuts
are check-tightened during the first week of operation until they are
properly set in. This should be done at intervals of 4-5 operating
hours (up to approx. 40-50 operating hours). Then the wheel nuts are
check-tightened according to intervals described in the maintenance
manual.

96 5 Handling – Daily inspection
5.2 Daily inspection

General
Daily inspection of the machine is extremely important in order to
ensure that it is safe both for the operator and its surroundings.
Every operator should perform checks before a new work shift. In this
way, operators can avoid running defective machines with malfunctions
that have been generated or caused during an earlier work shift.
WARNING
Never use a machine without first performing the daily
inspection.
Risk of personal injury and property damage!
For work instructions, see6.1 Daily inspection, page
187. Report to the foreman/supervisor if defects are
found on the machine during daily inspection!
For work instructions, see6.1 Daily inspection, page 187.

5 Handling – Error codes 97
5.3 Error codes

Error codes, general
Error codes indicate that there is a defect on the machine. Errors are
10:23 d indicated by an Indicator light for active errors (position 18) on the
CUSTOMER SETTI NGS
a steering wheel panel. The number of active errors is totalled on the
display (position a-c). Some error codes are displayed via pop-up
0
e menus to attract the operator's attention. The error codes should be
b used by operators and service technicians to identify faults and to
0 implement suitable action.
c In case of an error code indication, it's very important to identify the

error code and to perform an action to correct the problem.
015223
0
All error code information for active and inactive error codes is collected
a. Number of active error codes with error code on the operating menu Customer settings and the sub-menus Active
level stop. Errors (position d) and Error history (position e).
b. Number of active error codes with error code Select Active Errors or Error history with or and press to
level warning. activate the desired menu.
c. Number of active error codes with error code
level information.
d. Menu for active error codes, Active errors.
e. Menu for inactive error codes, Error history.
Error code information via pop-up menu
Error code information via pop-up menu
10:23 Error codes are automatically shown via pop-up menus on the display.
Some information about the error code can be read out directly by
the symbols in the pop-up menu. The menus Active errors and Error
history show detailed information about the error codes.
Press to show specific detailed information via the Active errors

menu.
Press to confirm the error and the display returns to show the menu
that was active before the pop-up men was activated. If there are more
015224
active errors, the next pop-up menu is shown.

Σ5
Example figure
Error code information Active errors
Error code information Active errors
10:23
Detailed information about the error codes are presented under Active
ACTI VE ERRORS 1/ 10 errors where, among others, the error code level, action with error code
and the device that generated the error code are presented.
0 1 1 1/ 5 48 0- 5
For information about how the error code should be interpreted, see
Field d: Error code number, page 104.
0 Scroll through active error codes with and . Leave the error code
list by pressing the function key .
015225
Example figure Active errors

98 5 Handling – Error codes
Error code information in Error history
Error code information in Error history
10:23
Detailed information about the last 50 inactive error codes is presented
ERROR HI STORY 1/ 12 under Error history where, amongst other things, the error code level,
the unit that generated the error code and the date and time are
1 11 1 / 5 170 - / 3 presented.
0
20 11 - 09 - 19 1 0: 2 3
For information about how the error code should be interpreted, see
2 11 1 / 5 160 - / 3 Field d: Error code number, page 104.
0 20 11 - 09 - 19 1 0: 2 3
3 Scroll through inactive error codes with and . Leave the error code
0/ 0- / 0
00 00 - 00 - 00 0 0: 0 0 list by pressing the function key .
014945
0
Example figure Error history
Action in the event of error code
CAUTION
STOP indicates a malfunction in the machine which
may affect the safety of the operator and others in the
vicinity or may cause a breakdown. - Read the error
code. Switch off the engine and perform action in
accordance with the error code table.
WARNING and INFORMATION alarms indicate
malfunctions of such character that work does not
have to be stopped. The machine's capacity may be
limited and certain functions may stop working. -
Perform actions according to error code table as soon
as possible.
10:23 1 Errors are indicated through the pop-up menus, and by an indicator
light for active errors (position 18) being lit.
Stop the machine and let the engine run at idle speed.
2 Identify error code level, see Field a: Error code level, page 101.
NOTE
If several error codes come from the engine or transmission, the
error code level is shown for the most serious error code.
015224
Σ5 3 Note all error codes. For explanation, see Display figure for error
code information, page 101.
4 Perform the action depending on the action symbol shown in the
Example figure
middle field, see Field b: Operator action, page 101.
5 Check: Start the engine and check under Active errors that the
error code has disappeared.

5 Handling – Error code indication 99
5.3.1 Error code indication

General
10:23 Error codes are indicated with an activated indicator light for active
error codes (position 18) and a pop-up menu. The error codes are
divided into three error code levels depending on their severity.
The error code levels are shown as follows:

a b c d • STOP is indicated by:
1. Lit indicator light for active fault codes (position 18).
2. STOP symbol in the pop-up menu.
3. Red border around the pop-up menu.
Σ5 • WARNING indicated by:
2. Warning triangle in the pop-up menu.
3. Yellow border around the pop-up menu.
• INFORMATION indicated by.
2. Information symbol in the pop-up menu.
3. Grey border around the pop-up menu.
015226
a Symbol for the error code level

STOP, WARNING or INFORMATION
b Symbol for action
c Symbol for component
d Border indicates error code level
Red = STOP
Yellow = WARNING
Grey = INFORMATION

100 5 Handling – Error code information on display
5.3.2 Error code information on display

Error code display
Error code information is shown with display figures in two ways:
10:23 • Automatically in display.

The error code is confirmed by . When the error code is
confirmed the display returns to the previous selected menu. If the
error code is active then it is stored in the error code list under the
operating menu Active errors.
If the error code remains active, the figure returns in the display
within 3-5 minutes. Level STOP error codes are shown five times,
WARNING three times and INFORMATION once or not at all.
014954
Σ5
Example of automatic figure in display
10:23
• In error code list Active errors.
ACTI VE ERRORS 1/ 10 Active error codes are stored in the error code list. Navigate to
the operating menu Customer settings with or , select Active
0 1 1 1/ 5 48 0- 5 errors and confirm with . Navigate the error code list with the
function keys and . Leave the error code list by pressing the
function key .
0
NOTE
If error code isn't included in the error code list, it may be due to
015225
0
the following:
Example of the error code list Active errors – condition for error detection no longer exists, e.g., control
lever is released or engine is off.
– loose connection/poor contact.

5 Handling – Error code information on display 101
Display figure for error code information
10:23 The menus are divided into fields where the information is displayed.
• Field a: Error code level. Shown with a symbol.
• Field b: Operator action. Shown with a symbol.
• Field c: Component that generated the error code. Shown with
a b c a symbol.
• Field d: Error code.
• Field e: Number of errors. For Error history the number of errors
is limited to the last 50 errors.
015228
• Field f: Number of errors on each error code level.
h
• Field g: Date and time.
Pop-up menu for error codes • Field h: Number of unconfirmed pop-up menus.
10:23
Field a: Error code level
ACTI VE ERRORS e
f The control and monitoring system gives error code information in three
0 d levels which are indicated with a symbol in the display unit.
Symbol Action
0 a b c STOP
Indicates a serious malfunction that may jeopardise
the operator's safety or cause machine failure. The
015229
0
error code must be attended to immediately.
WARNING
Active error codes shown in Active errors
Indicates malfunction in machine that should be
10:23 taken care of as soon as possible.
ERROR HI STORY e
f
1 INFORMATION
0 a d c
g Information to operator about something that should
2 be taken care of, e.g., broken bulb. Take care of the
111 / 5 160 - / 3
0 cause at a suitable time. Action instruction is often
20 11 - 09 - 19 1 0: 2 3
found in chapter 6 Inspection and maintenance.
3 0/ 0- / 0
00 00 - 00 - 00 0 0: 0 0 Field b: Operator action
015230
The control system provides information about what action the operator
Inactive error codes are shown in Error history should carry out. The information is indicated with a symbol on the
display unit.
Symbol Action
Carry out action according to the daily inspection,
see Instructions, page 187.
Error requires action by trained personnel.

One of the functions of the machine is not working
fully.
Critical error.
Errors that may jeopardise the machine or safety,
such as low oil pressure or overload. Stop the
machine and safeguard the error.
Read the operator's manual.

Field c: Affected function

For an explanation of the display fields, see Display figure for error
Symbol Function Symbol Function Symbol Function

Engine Fuel level AdBlue level
Temperature electric Temperature electric Particulate filters

motor drive motor hydraulics
Exhaust temperature Air filter Engine coolant level
Coolant temperature Engine oil level Preheating engine

engine
Transmission Oil temperature torque Lock-up, torque converter

converter
Differential locks Transmission oil level Oil pressure, transmission
Transmission oil Power transmission Tyre pressure

temperature
Regulator (inverter) Brakes Brake pressure
Parking brake Oil temperature brake Steering

system
Suspension Load handling Control levers
Lift/lower Lift/lower Extension
Side shift Side shift Spreading (positioning)
Spreading (positioning) Rotation Tilt
Tilt lock Tilt Levelling

Symbol Function Symbol Function Symbol Function

Levelling lock Levelling Contact twistlocks
Locked twistlocks Unlocked twistlocks Contact top-lift attachment
Contact side-lift Bottom lift attachment Support jacks

attachment
Control system Boom angle Boom length
Scales Overload system Overload system
Height limit Frame, body, cab and Hour meter (operating

accessories hours)
Seat Revolving driver's seat Air conditioning
ECH, ECC Fresh air filter Pause heater
Recirculation Washer fluid Wipers
Revolving or flashing Lighting Horn

beacon
Heating rear Cab sliding length Vertically adjustable cab

windscreen/rear view
mirrors
Tiltable cab Central lubrication Hydraulic oil filter
Hydraulic oil temperature Battery charging CAN bus
CAN bus drivetrain

Field d: Error code number
Field d: Error code number

The control system gives error codes from the machine's sub-systems:
1 2 3 Device number (AAA)
10:23
The first part of the error code specifies the device that generated the
ACTI VE ERRORS error. The following devices can generate error codes:
AAA/ BCCCC- DD E
Device number Unit
0
1–99 Devices in the RedCAN system
100 Engine
0
111 Transmission ZF
210 Exhaust system
015233
Component type (B)

Example figure error codes A letter before the digits in the component number specifies the type of
1. Device number (AAA) component concerned. The following component types can be read:
2. Component number (SPN) (BCCCC-DD)
Component letter Component type
3. Type of error (FMI) (E)
A Unit
B Torque converter
G Battery or alternator
H Horn
K Relay
M Electric motor
R Resistor
Y Solenoid valve
Component (CCCC)
The digits are a unique number (SPN) to locate the faulty component.

Component placement (DD)

In cases where multiple components have the same component
number two letters or a serial number 1-9 are added to make the error
code unique. The letters usually denote a location on the machine.
The following locations are used:
Letters Location
LE Left
RI Right
UP Upper
LO Lower
FR Front
Front Left front
RF Right front
RE Rear
LR Left rear
RR Right rear
Type of error (EE)

The FMI code denotes the type of error.
Table Specifications FMI
FMI Description SAE-text

0 Value too high. Data valid, but higher than normal operating range.
1 Value too low. Data valid, but lower than normal operating range.
2 Incorrect data. Intermittent or incorrect data.
3 Electrical problem. Abnormally high voltage or short-circuit to higher voltage.
4 Electrical problem. Abnormally low voltage or short-circuit to lower voltage.
5 Electrical problem. Abnormally low current or open circuit.
6 Electrical problem. Abnormally high current or short-circuit to ground.
7 Mechanical problem. Incorrect response from mechanical system.
8 Mechanical problem or electrical Abnormal frequency.
problem.
9 Communication error. Abnormal update rate.
10 Mechanical problem or electrical Abnormally wide variations.
problem.
11 Unknown malfunction. Non-identifiable malfunction.
12 Component error. Incorrect unit or component.
13 Incorrect calibration. Values outside calibration values.
14 Unknown malfunction. Special instructions.
15 Value too high. Data valid but higher than normal operating range: The least serious
level.
16 Value too high. Data valid but higher than normal operating range: Moderately
serious level.
17 Value too low. Data valid but under normal operating range: The least serious level.
18 Value too low. Data valid but under normal operating range: Moderately serious
level.
19 Communication error. Received network data incorrect.

FMI Description SAE-text

20 Data too high. Data valid but higher than normal value.
21 Data too low. Data valid but lower than normal value.
22-30 Reserved for SAE-allocation.
31 FMI not available or the condition Not available or the condition exists.
indicated by SPN exists.
32 Electrical problem. Abnormally high resistance or short-circuit to higher voltage.
33 Electrical problem. Abnormally low resistance or short-circuit to lower voltage.
34 Time exceeded. Time exceeded.
35 Communication error. CAN bus error.
36 Communication error. Driver error.
37 Communication error. Over flow.
38 Communication error. Error passive stat.
39 Communication error. Baud rate.
40 Communication error. Control unit disappears (stop sending messages) after start up.
41 Communication error. Control unit missing on start up.
42 Communication error. CAN-bus segment after the control unit is faulty. Normal side.
43 Communication error. CAN-bus segment after the control unit is faulty. RedCAN side.
44 Communication error. Control unit incorrectly positioned RedCAN circuit.
45 Communication error. Checksum error in the control unit.
Field e: Number of error codes

Specifies the number of menu pages with active fault codes in Active
errors and the number of menu pages with inactive error codes Error
history.
Field f: Number of errors on each error code level

Specifies the number of active error codes on each error code level.
Field g: Date and time

Specifies the date and time when the error code was confirmed.
Field h: Number of unconfirmed pop-up menus

Specifies the number of unconfirmed pop-up menus.

5 Handling – Error code tables 107
5.3.3 Error code tables

General
Error codes are sorted in numerical order. The tables contain the
following information:
• Code - Indicates error code.
• Description - Indicates description of the error code as well as any
limitation that can occur in the machine in case of the error code
in question.
• Action - Indicates STOP/WARNING/INFORMATION for action
according to error code level, with or without detailed information.
If the error code number isn't included in the error code table, contact
service.
Error codes machine
Error codes machine
Type SPN FMI Nod- Loca- Description Action

e tion
H 1037 6 11 2 Indicator light, levelling lock, in control WARNING!
lever.
S 1310 7 11 Travel direction selector, logical error. STOP!
B 2190 2 1 Sensor, cab filter. INFO
B 2460 2 1 Low pressure, air conditioning. WARNING!
K 3150 6 1 Relay, ignition, grounded circuit. STOP!
K 3312 6 1 Driving forward relay, signal status. INFORMATION
K 3312 6 2 Driving forward relay, signal status. INFORMATION
K 3320 6 1 Driving reverse relay, signal status. INFORMATION
K 3320 6 2 Driving reverse relay, signal status. INFORMATION
K 3600 6 2 Relay, starter motor. WARNING!
Only Cummins QSM11.
E 4000 5 2 LE Low beam, left. Check the lamp. INFORMATION
E 4000 6 2 LE Low beam, left. INFORMATION
E 4000 5 2 RI Low beam, right. Check the lamp. INFORMATION
E 4000 6 2 RI Low beam, right. INFORMATION
E 4020 5 2 LE High beam, left. Check the lamp. INFORMATION
E 4020 6 2 LE High beam, left. INFORMATION
E 4020 5 2 RI High beam, right. Check the lamp. INFORMATION
E 4020 6 2 RI High beam, right. INFORMATION
E 4041 5 2 1 Extra work lights, frame left. Check the INFORMATION
lamp.
E 4041 6 2 1 Extra work lights, frame left. INFORMATION
E 4041 5 2 2 Extra work lights, frame right. Check the INFORMATION
lamp.
E 4041 6 2 2 Extra work lights, frame right. INFORMATION
E 4042 5 1 LE Extra work lights, cab left. Check the INFORMATION
lamp.
E 4042 6 1 LE Extra work lights, cab left. INFORMATION

108 5 Handling – Error code tables
Error codes machine

e tion
E 4042 5 1 RI Extra work lights, cab right. Check the INFORMATION
lamp.
E 4042 6 1 RI Extra work lights, cab right. INFORMATION
E 4042 6 1 1 Extra work lights left. INFORMATION
E 4042 6 1 1 Extra work lights right. INFORMATION
E 4043 5 2 LE Work lights boom left. Check the lamp. INFORMATION
E 4043 6 2 LE Work lights boom left. INFORMATION
E 4043 5 2 RI Work lights boom right. Check the lamp. INFORMATION
E 4043 6 2 RI Work lights boom right. INFORMATION
E 4044 5 7 LE-B Extra work lights attachment, left. Check WARNING!
the lamp.
E 4044 6 7 LE-B Extra work lights attachment, left. WARNING!
E 4044 5 7 RI-B Extra work lights attachment, right. Check WARNING!
the lamp.
E 4044 6 7 RI-B Extra work lights attachment, right. WARNING!
E 4044 5 7 LE Work lights attachment, left. Check the WARNING!
lamp.
E 4044 6 7 LE Work lights attachment, left. WARNING!
E 4044 5 7 RI Work lights attachment, right. Check the WARNING!
lamp.
E 4044 6 7 RI Work lights attachment, right. WARNING!
E 4045 5, 6 6 Front Extra work lights attachment lift leg left WARNING!
front
E 4045 5, 6 6 RF Extra work lights attachment lift leg right WARNING!
front
E 4045 5, 6 6 LR Extra work lights attachment lift leg left WARNING!
rear
E 4045 5, 6 6 RR Extra work lights attachment lift leg right WARNING!
rear
H 4110 6 2 Brake light. INFORMATION
H 4120 6 2 1 Tail lights. INFORMATION
H 4160 6 2 Position light. INFORMATION
H 4220 6 2 LE Direction indicators left. INFORMATION
H 4220 6 2 RI Direction indicators right. INFORMATION
H 4281 6 2 Revolving beacon, frame WARNING!
H 4283 6 1 Revolving beacon, boom. WARNING!
H 4284 6, 5 7 Revolving beacon, attachment. WARNING!
E 4340 6 1 Interior lighting. WARNING!
H 5001 6 7 Indicator light overheight legs up. WARNING!
H 5620 6 1 2 Indicator light unlocked twistlocks (roof WARNING!
panel cab).
H 5620 6 7 1 Indicator light, unlocked twistlocks WARNING!

Error codes machine

e tion
H 5630 6 1 2 Indicator light, locked twistlocks (roof WARNING!
panel cab).
H 5630 6 7 1 Indicator light, locked twistlocks. WARNING!
H 5640 6 1 2 Indicator light, contact (roof panel cab). WARNING!
H 5640 6 7 1 Indicator light, contact twistlocks. WARNING!
H 5740 6 1 Indicator light, support jacks down, WARNING!
grounded circuit (roof panel cab).
H 5760 6 6 Front Indicator light contact lift leg front left WARNING!
H 5760 6 6 RF Indicator light contact lift leg front right WARNING!
H 5760 6 6 LR Indicator light contact lift leg rear left WARNING!
H 5760 6 6 RR Indicator light contact lift leg rear right WARNING!
H 5800 6 6 UP Indicator light lift legs front up WARNING!
H 5800 6 6 LO Indicator light lift legs front down WARNING!
H 5780 6 6 FR Indicator light lift legs clamping position WARNING!
front
H 5780 6 6 RE Indicator light lift legs clamping position WARNING!
rear
H 5991 6 1 0 Indicator light, buckled seat belt. WARNING!
H 5992 6 1 Indicator light, Mini steering wheel/joystick WARNING!
control.
H 5993 6 11 3 Indicator light, tilt lock, control lever. WARNING!
Y 6003 6, 5 2 Solenoid valve engagement of hydraulic WARNING!
top lift.
Y 6004 6, 5 2 Solenoid valve lower. WARNING!
Y 6005 6, 5 2 Solenoid valve lift. WARNING!
Y 6006 6, 5 2 Solenoid valve boom out. WARNING!
Y 6007 6, 5 2 Solenoid valve boom in. WARNING!
Y 6008 6, 5 7 Solenoid valve rotation clockwise. WARNING!
Y 6009 6, 5 7 Solenoid valve rotation anticlockwise. WARNING!
Y 6010 6, 5 7 Solenoid valve tilt out WARNING!
Y 6011 6, 5 7 Solenoid valve tilt in WARNING!
Y 6012 6, 5 7 1 Solenoid valve tilt lock. WARNING!
Y 6012 6, 5 7 2 Solenoid valve tilt lock. WARNING!
Y 6016 6, 5 2 Solenoid valve cab movement up/forward. WARNING!
Y 6017 6, 5 2 Solenoid valve cab movement WARNING!
lower/backward.
Y 6018 6, 5 7 Solenoid valve spreading out. WARNING!
Y 6019 6, 5 7 Solenoid valve spreading in. WARNING!
Y 6020 6, 5 7 LE Solenoid valve side shift left. WARNING!
Y 6021 6, 5 7 RI Solenoid valve side shift right. WARNING!
Y 6034 6, 5 7 1 Solenoid valve levelling lock. WARNING!

Error codes machine

e tion
Y 6034 6, 5 7 2 Solenoid valve levelling lock. WARNING!
Y 6035 6, 5 7 Solenoid valve levelling anticlockwise. WARNING!
Y 6036 6, 5 7 Solenoid valve levelling clockwise. WARNING!
Y 6039 6, 5 7 Solenoid valve open twistlocks. WARNING!
Y 6040 6, 5 7 Solenoid valve lock twistlocks. WARNING!
Y 6045 6, 5 2 RI Solenoid valve blocking lower right. WARNING!
Y 6045 6, 5 2 LE Solenoid valve blocking lower left. WARNING!
Y 6050 6, 5 2 Solenoid valve blocking boom in. WARNING!
Y 6051 6, 5 2 1 Solenoid valve regeneration boom out. WARNING!
Y 6051 6, 5 2 RI Solenoid valve regeneration lift right. WARNING!
Y 6051 6, 5 2 LE Solenoid valve regeneration lift left. WARNING!
Y 6053 6, 5 6 LE Solenoid valve operating position left WARNING!
Y 6053 6, 5 6 RI Solenoid valve operating position right WARNING!
Y 6054 6, 5 6 LE Solenoid valve clamp left WARNING!
Y 6054 6, 5 6 RI Solenoid valve clamp right WARNING!
Y 6054 6 7 Solenoid valve clamp ELME. WARNING!
Y 6055 6, 5 6 LE Solenoid valve unclamp left WARNING!
Y 6055 6, 5 6 RI Solenoid valve unclamp right WARNING!
Y 6055 6 7 Solenoid valve unload ELME. WARNING!
Y 6056 6, 5 6 Front Solenoid valve front knee in left WARNING!
Y 6056 6, 5 6 RF Solenoid valve front knee in right WARNING!
Y 6056 6, 5 6 LR Solenoid valve rear knee in left WARNING!
Y 6056 6, 5 6 RR Solenoid valve rear knee in right WARNING!
Y 6057 6, 5 6 Front Solenoid valve front knee out left WARNING!
Y 6057 6, 5 6 RF Solenoid valve front knee out right WARNING!
Y 6057 6, 5 6 LR Solenoid valve rear knee out left WARNING!
Y 6057 6, 5 6 RR Solenoid valve rear knee out right WARNING!
Y 6058 6, 5 6 Front Solenoid valve front leg up left WARNING!
Y 6058 6, 5 6 RF Solenoid valve front leg up right WARNING!
Y 6058 6, 5 6 LR Solenoid valve rear leg up left WARNING!
Y 6058 6 7 FR Solenoid valve front legs down ELME. WARNING!
Y 6058 6 7 RE Solenoid valve rear legs up ELME. WARNING!
Y 6058 5, 6 7 RR Solenoid valve rear leg up right. WARNING!
Y 6059 6, 5 6 Front Solenoid valve front leg down left WARNING!
Y 6059 6, 5 6 RF Solenoid valve front leg down right WARNING!
Y 6059 6, 5 6 LR Solenoid valve rear leg down left WARNING!
Y 6059 6 7 FR Solenoid valve front legs down ELME. WARNING!
Y 6059 6 7 RE Solenoid valve rear legs down ELME. WARNING!

Error codes machine

e tion
Y 6059 5, 6 7 RR Solenoid valve rear leg down right WARNING!
Y 6063 5, 6 3 Solenoid valve support jacks up. WARNING!
Y 6064 5, 6 3 Solenoid valve support jacks down. WARNING!
Y 6070 6, 5 7 Solenoid valve overheight legs up. WARNING!
Y 6071 6, 5 7 Solenoid valve overheight legs down. WARNING!
Y 6093 6, 5 2 Solenoid valve pump unloading boom in. WARNING!
Y 6120 6, 5 1 1 Damper motor, recirculation. INFORMATION
Y 6120 6, 5 1 2 Damper motor, recirculation. INFORMATION
Y 6150 6 2 1 Voltage feed to electric control module for STOP!
joystick control/mini steering wheel.
Y 6150 6, 5 2 2 Electric control module for joystick STOP!
control/mini steering wheel.
Y 6150 2 2 3 Electric control module for joystick STOP!
control/mini steering wheel.
Y 6420 6, 5, 2 Solenoid valve parking brake. STOP!
2
Y 6450 6, 5 2 Electromagnetic clutch cooling INFORMATION
compressor.
M 6502 7 1 Wiper rear window, position signal. INFORMATION
M 6502 6, 5 1 Rear windscreen wipers. INFORMATION
M 6503 7 1 Combined wipers, windscreen and roof INFORMATION
window, position signal.
M 6503 6, 5 1 Combined wipers, windscreen and roof INFORMATION
window.
M 6512 6, 5 1 Engine washer fluid, rear windscreen. INFORMATION
M 6513 6, 5 1 Engine washer fluid, combined wipers INFORMATION
front windscreen and roof window.
M 6570 6, 5 1 Heating fan. INFORMATION
M 6580 6, 5, 2 Electromagnetic clutch cooling fan
7 engine.
M 6590 6, 5 2 Cooling fan intercooler.
M 6590 7 2 LE Cooling fan intercooler.
M 6590 7 2 RI Cooling fan intercooler.
M 6670 6, 5 1 Circulation pump pause heater. INFORMATION
M 6680 6, 5 2 Cooling fan, hydraulic oil cooler. WARNING!
Y 6720 3, 4 1 Damper motor air distribution, position INFORMATION
signal.
Y 6720 6, 5 1 1 Damper motor air distribution. INFORMATION
Y 6720 6, 5 1 2 Damper motor air distribution. INFORMATION
Y 6730 3, 4 1 Heating valve, position signal. INFORMATION
Y 6730 6, 5 1 1 Heating valve. INFORMATION
Y 6730 6, 5 1 2 Heating valve. INFORMATION

Error codes machine

e tion
M 6740 6, 5 2 Cooling valve oil cooler brake system. WARNING!
B 6900 3, 4 11 1 Accelerator pedal, signal A. WARNING!
B 6900 3, 4 11 2 Accelerator pedal, signal B. WARNING!
M 6930 6, 5 2 1 Pump central lubrication frame. INFORMATION
M 6930 6 7 Pump central lubrication attachment. INFORMATION
B 6941 3, 4, 11 Engine right dashboard panel INFORMATION
7 forward/backward position signal.
M 6941 6 11 1, 2 Engine right dashboard panel INFORMATION
forward/backward.
B 6942 3, 4, 11 Engine right dashboard panel up/down INFORMATION
7 position signal.
M 6942 6 11 1, 2 Engine right dashboard panel up/down. INFORMATION
B 6943 3, 4, 11 Engine steering wheel panel up/down INFORMATION
7 position signal.
M 6943 6 11 1, 2 Engine steering wheel panel up/down. INFORMATION
P 7080 14 1, 3, Operating hours do not correspond WARNING!
6, 7, to reference Control unit frame KFU
11, 12 (D7971).
B 7202 2 7 Sensor, contact jammed. WARNING!
Check that the indicator pin is not binding
and that the sensor is clean.
B 7205 7 7 LE Sensor, twistlocks locked and open WARNING!
simultaneously.
Check that the sensor is clean.
B 7205 7 7 RI Sensor, twistlocks locked and open WARNING!
simultaneously
Check that the sensor is clean.
B 7226 3, 4 2 1 Sensor hydraulic pressure, lift cylinder WARNING!
piston side left.
piston side right.
rod side left.
rod side right.
B 7230 3, 4 7 Sensor damping attachment. INFORMATION
B 7241 3, 4, 2 Sensor boom angle. WARNING!
7
B 7242 7 2 Sensor, central lubrication timeout INFORMATION
B 7242 7 7 Sensor, central lubrication timeout INFORMATION
B 7252 3, 4 11 Ambient light intensity sensor. WARNING!
B 7254 3, 4 1 Sensor, cab position. WARNING!
B 7570 3, 4 2 Sensor fuel level. INFORMATION
B 7680 3, 4 7 LE Sensor, clamping pressure. WARNING!

Error codes machine

e tion
B 7680 3, 4 7 RI Sensor, clamping pressure. WARNING!
B 7681 3, 4 2 Brake pressure sensor. WARNING!
B 7682 3, 4, 2 Sensor parking brake WARNING!
15
B 7683 3, 4 2 Accumulator pressure sensor. WARNING!
B 7686 3, 4, 2 Sensor boom length. WARNING!
7
B 7720 0 2 High temperature oil brake system. STOP!
B 7720 32, 2 Sensor, oil temperature brake system. WARNING!
33
B 7740 32, 1 Ambient temperature sensor. INFORMATION
33
B 7751 32, 1 Inner temperature sensor. INFORMATION
33
B 7752 32, 1 Fan temperature sensor. INFORMATION
33
B 7753 32, 1 Temperature display sensor. INFORMATION
33
B 7760 32, 2 Hydraulic oil temperature sensor. WARNING!
33
A 7870 2 2 Sensor fault, overload system. STOP!
D 7901 31 12 Control unit missing. STOP!
E 8020 6, 5 2 Electrically-heated rear view mirror. INFORMATION
R 8070 3, 4 11 1 Control lever lift/lower. WARNING!
R 8070 3, 4 11 2 Control lever, boom out/in and levelling. WARNING!
R 8070 3, 4 11 3 Control lever, tilt and rotation. WARNING!
R 8070 3, 4 11 4 Control lever, side shift and spreading. WARNING!
R 8250 3, 4 1 Potentiometer joystick control. STOP!
R 8250 3, 4 1 1 Potentiometer mini-steering wheel, STOP!
channel 1.
R 8250 3, 4 1 2 Potentiometer mini-steering wheel, STOP!
channel 2.
H 8500 6 1 Horn. WARNING!
K 8881 6 1 Relay rear windscreen heating. INFORMATION
H 9003 6, 5 7 Buzzer automatic spreading 20'–40'. WARNING!
A 9630 6, 5 2 Fire extinguishing system.
H 9650 6 2 1 Back-up alarm. WARNING!

Error codes machine

e tion
10002 14 1 Configuration number does not STOP!
correspond for Control unit KCU (D7901).
correspond for Control unit KFU (D7971).
correspond for Control unit KFU-2
(D7972).
correspond for Control unit KAU-2
(D7912).
correspond for Control unit KAU (D7911).
correspond for Control unit KPU (D7902).
correspond for Control unit KID (D7950).
10003 14 1 Program version does not correspond for WARNING!
Control unit KCU (D7901).
Control unit KFU (D7971).
Control unit KFU-2 (D7972).
Control unit KAU (D7911).
Control unit KPU (D7902).
Control unit KID (D7950).
10004 14 1 No setup file for Control unit KCU STOP!
(D7901).
10004 14 2 No setup file for Control unit KFU (D7971). STOP!
10004 14 3 No setup file for Control unit KFU-2 STOP!
(D7972).
10004 14 6 No setup file for Control unit KAU-2 STOP!
(D7912).
10004 14 7 No setup file for Control unit KAU (D7911). STOP!
10004 14 11 No setup file for Control unit KPU STOP!
(D7902).
10004 14 12 No setup file for Control unit KID (D7950). STOP!
10005 14 1 1 No drivetrain parameter file, Control unit STOP!
KCU (D7901).
KCU KFU (D7971).
10005 14 2 2 No load sensor parameter file, Control STOP!
unit KCU KFU (D7971).
10005 14 2 3 No fuel tank parameter file, Control unit STOP!
KCU KFU (D7971).

Error codes machine

e tion
10005 14 2 4 No central lubrication parameter file, STOP!
10005 14 2 5 No front tyre parameter file, Control unit STOP!
KFU (D7971).
10005 14 2 6 No overload system (OLS) parameter file, STOP!
10005 14 2 7 No parameter file Eco Drive Mode (EDM), STOP!
10005 14 11 7 No control lever parameter file, Control STOP!
unit KPU (D7902).
KID (D7950).
10101 4 1 Battery voltage Control unit KCU (D7901). STOP!
Check the fuses.
10101 3 1 Battery voltage Control unit KCU (D7901). WARNING!
10102 4 1 Ignition voltage Control unit KCU (D7901). STOP!
Check the fuses.
10102 3 1 Ignition voltage Control unit KCU (D7901). WARNING!
10102 4 2 Ignition voltage Control unit KFU (D7971). STOP!
Check the fuses.
10102 3 2 Ignition voltage Control unit KFU (D7971). WARNING!
10102 6 2 2 Ignition voltage Control unit engine WARNING!
(D7940).
10102 4 3 Ignition voltage Control unit KFU-2 STOP!
(D7972). Check the fuses.
10102 3 3 Ignition voltage Control unit KFU-2 WARNING!
(D7972).
10102 4 6 Ignition voltage Control unit KAU-2 STOP!
(D7912). Check the fuses.
10102 4 7 Ignition voltage Control unit KAU (D7911). STOP!
Check the fuses.
10102 3 7 Ignition voltage Control unit KAU (D7911). WARNING!
10102 4 11 Ignition voltage Control unit KPU (D7902). STOP!
Check the fuses.
10102 3 11 Ignition voltage Control unit KPU (D7902). WARNING!
10102 4 12 Ignition voltage Control unit KID (D7950). STOP!
Check the fuses.
10102 3 12 Ignition voltage Control unit KID (D7950). WARNING!
10103 6 1 Redundant voltage feed Control unit KCU STOP!
(D7901).
10103 3, 4 2 Redundant voltage feed Control unit KFU STOP!
(D7971).
10103 3, 4 3 Redundant voltage feed Control unit STOP!
KFU-2 (D7972).
10103 3, 4 6 Redundant voltage feed Control unit STOP!
KAU-2 (D7912).

Error codes machine

e tion
10103 3, 4 7 Redundant voltage feed Control unit KAU STOP!
(D7911).
10103 4 11 Redundant voltage feed Control unit KPU STOP!
(D7902).
10103 3, 4 12 Redundant voltage feed Control unit KID STOP!
(D7950).
10104 3, 4 1 5V reference voltage Control unit KCU WARNING!
(D7901).
10104 3, 4 2 5V reference voltage Control unit KFU WARNING!
(D7971).
10104 3, 4 3 5V reference voltage Control unit KFU-2 WARNING!
(D7972).
10104 3, 4 7 5V reference voltage Control unit KAU WARNING!
(D7911).
10104 3, 4 11 5V reference voltage Control unit KPU WARNING!
(D7902).
10104 3, 4 11 1 5V voltage feed to steering wheel panel. WARNING!
10104 6 11 2 Background lighting, steering wheel WARNING!
panel.
10104 6 11 3 Function lighting, steering wheel panel. WARNING!
10104 3, 4 12 5V reference voltage Control unit KID WARNING!
(D7950).
10105 2, 6 2 1, 2 Reference ground Control unit KFU WARNING!
(D7971).
10105 2, 6 3 1, 2 Reference ground Control unit KFU-2 WARNING!
(D7972).
10105 2, 6 7 1, 2, 3 Reference ground Control unit KAU WARNING!
(D7911).
10106 6 1 24V voltage feed left-hand arm rest (mini STOP!
steering wheel/joystick control).
10106 6 2 1 24V voltage feed sensor frame. WARNING!
10106 6 6 Front 24V voltage feed sensor lift leg, front left. WARNING!
10106 6 6 RF 24V voltage feed sensor lift leg, front right. WARNING!
10106 6 6 LR 24V voltage feed sensor lift leg, rear left. WARNING!
10106 6 6 RR 24V voltage feed sensor lift leg, rear right. WARNING!
10106 6 7 1 24V voltage feed sensor attachment, WARNING!
ELME.
10106 6 7 LE 24V voltage feed sensor attachment, left. WARNING!
10106 6 7 RI 24V voltage feed sensor attachment, WARNING!
right.
10106 6 11 1 24V voltage feed switch cab. WARNING!
10106 6 11 2 24V voltage feed switch cab. WARNING!
10106 6 11 3 24V voltage feed components cab. WARNING!
10107 6 11 1 Guide lights dashboard panel. WARNING!

Error codes machine

e tion
10201 40 1 CAN bus, control unit disappeared after STOP!
start-up, Control unit KCU (D7901).
10201 41 1 CAN bus, control unit not found at STOP!
start-up, Control unit KCU (D7901).
10201 42 1 CAN bus, segment error normal side, WARNING!
10201 43 1 CAN bus, segment error RedCAN side, WARNING!
start-up, Control unit KFU (D7971).
start-up, Control unit KFU (D7971).
start-up, Control unit KAU (D7911).
start-up, Control unit KAU (D7911).
start-up, Control unit KPU (D7902).
start-up, Control unit KPU (D7902).
start-up, Control unit KID (D7950).
start-up, Control unit KID (D7950).
10201 44 12 CAN bus, control unit misplaced, Control STOP!
unit KID (D7950).
10202 35 2 CAN bus drivetrain open circuit. STOP!
10202 36 2 CAN bus drivetrain communication error. STOP!
10204 35 1 CAN bus option. STOP!

Error codes machine

e tion
10301 2 1 Non-volatile memory Control unit KCU STOP!
(D7901).
10301 2 2 Non-volatile memory Control unit KFU STOP!
(D7971).
10301 2 3 Non-volatile memory Control unit KFU STOP!
(D7972).
10301 2 6 Non-volatile memory Control unit KAU-2 STOP!
(D7912).
10301 2 7 Non-volatile memory Control unit KAU STOP!
(D7911).
10301 2 11 Non-volatile memory Control unit KPU STOP!
(D7902).
10301 2 12 Non-volatile memory Control unit KID STOP!
(D7950).
10302 2 1 Application log Control unit KCU (D7901). STOP!
10302 2 2 Application log Control unit KFU (D7971). STOP!
10302 2 3 Application log Control unit KFU (D7972). STOP!
10302 2 6 Application log Control unit KAU-2 STOP!
(D7912).
10302 2 7 Application log Control unit KAU (D7911). STOP!
10302 2 12 Application log Control unit KCU (D7901). STOP!
10303 0 1 High temperature circuit board, Control STOP!
unit KCU (D7901).
unit KFU (D7971).
unit KFU (D7972).
unit KAU-2 (D7912).
unit KAU (D7911).
unit KPU (D7902).
unit KID (D7950).
10304 2 1 Processing time for software in Control STOP!
unit KCU (D7901).
unit KFU (D7971).
unit KFU (D7972).
unit KAU (D7911).

Error codes machine

e tion
unit KPU (D7902).
unit KID (D7950).
10305 6 1 High power consumption Control unit WARNING!
KCU (D7901).
KFU (D7971).
KFU (D7972).
KAU (D7911).
KPU (D7902).
10305 6 12 High power consumption Control unit KID WARNING!
(D7950).
10306 4 2 1, 2, 3 Control breaker voltage Control unit KFU STOP!
(D7971).
10306 4 3 1, 2, 3 Control breaker voltage Control unit KFU STOP!
(D7972).
10306 3 2 1, 2, 3 Control breaker voltage Control unit KFU WARNING!
(D7971).
10306 3 3 1, 2, 3 Control breaker voltage Control unit KFU WARNING!
(D7972).
10306 4 6 1, 2, 3 Control breaker voltage Control unit STOP!
KAU-2 (D7912).
10306 4 7 1, 2, 3 Control breaker voltage Control unit KAU STOP!
(D7911).
10306 3 7 1, 2, 3 Control breaker voltage Control unit KAU WARNING!
(D7911).
10307 2 1 Memory error Control unit KCU (D7901). STOP!
10307 2 2 Memory error Control unit KFU (D7971). STOP!
10307 2 6 Memory error Control unit KAU-2 STOP!
(D7912).
10307 2 7 Memory error Control unit KAU (D7911). STOP!
10307 2 11 Memory error Control unit KPU (D7902). STOP!
10307 2 12 Memory error Control unit KID (D7950). STOP!
(D7912).

Error codes machine

e tion
(D7912).

Error codes engine

• The display indicates an error code as it appears in the machine,
according to SAE J1939 in SPN/FMI.
• J1587 indicates error code acc. to SAE J1587 (Volvo).
Error codes TAD1360VE Stage 3B/Tier 4i
Display
(SPN/FMI) J1587 Description Action
51/3 PID51/3 Position sensor, accelerator pedal. STOP
51/4 PID51/4 Position sensor, accelerator pedal STOP
51/5 PID51/5 Position sensor, accelerator pedal STOP
51/7 PID51/7 Position sensor, accelerator pedal. STOP
91/9 PID91/9 Signal from accelerator pedal. STOP
94/1 PID94/1 Fuel pressure sensor. STOP
97/0 PID97/0 Water in fuel. WARNING: Drain fuel prefilter,
see 6.2.2 Fuel system.
97/3 PID97/3 Sensor, water-in-fuel. STOP
97/4 PID97/4 Sensor, water-in-fuel. STOP
98/1 PID98/1 Low engine oil level. STOP: Check the oil level in the
engine. See 6.2.6 Engine oil.
98/3 PID98/3 Oil level sensor, engine. STOP: Check the oil level in the
100/1 PID100/1 Low oil pressure in engine. Reduced engine power or STOP: Check the oil level in the
engine is turned off. engine. See 6.2.6 Engine oil.
100/3 PID100/3 Oil pressure sensor. STOP
105/0 PID105/0 Too high charge-air temperature. Reduced engine power. STOP
105/4 PID105/4 Sensor, boost temperature. STOP
105/5 PID105/5 Sensor, boost temperature. STOP
105/16 PID105/16 Sensor, boost temperature. Reduced engine power.
106/0 PID106/0 High charge-air pressure. Reduced engine power. STOP
106/3 PID106/3 Sensor, boost pressure. The engine is smoking more than STOP
usual during acceleration/loading.
106/5 PID106/5 Sensor, boost pressure. The engine is smoking more than STOP
usual during acceleration/loading.
106/16 PID106/16 Sensor, boost pressure. STOP
107/0 PID107/0 Low air pressure. STOP
107/3 PID107/3 Sensor air pressure. STOP

Display
108/3 PID108/3 Sensor, air pressure, cable short-circuited to voltage. STOP
108/4 PID108/4 Sensor air pressure - abnormally low voltage or STOP
short-circuiting to lower voltage.
110/0 PID110/0 High coolant temperature. Reduced engine power or STOP: Check the coolant level.
engine is turned off. See 6.2.5 Cooling system.
110/4 PID110/4 Sensor, coolant temperature. STOP
111/1 PID111/1 Low coolant level. Reduced engine power. STOP: Check the coolant level.
See 6.2.5 Cooling system.
111/3 PID111/3 Sensor, coolant level. STOP
111/5 PID111/5 Sensor, coolant level. STOP
153/0 PID153/0 Too high crankcase ventilation pressure. The engine is STOP
switched off.
153/3 PID153/3 Sensor, crankcase ventilation pressure. STOP
153/5 PID153/5 Sensor, crankcase ventilation pressure. STOP
158/1 PID158/1 Low battery voltage, CIU. Engine may be difficult to start. STOP
158/3 PID158/3 Low battery voltage, CIU. STOP
158/4 PID158/4 Low battery voltage, CIU. STOP
172/4 PID172/4 Sensor, air temperature. STOP
172/5 PID172/5 Sensor, air temperature. STOP
175/0 PID175/0 High engine oil temperature. Reduced engine power. STOP
175/4 PID175/4 Sensor, oil temperature. STOP
190/16 PID190/16 Engine speed, value too high. STOP
354/3 PID354/3 Relative humidity. STOP
354/5 PID354/5 Relative humidity. Hygrometer shows 50%. STOP
442/4 PPID272/4 Humidity compensation for air temperature. STOP
442/5 PPID272/5 Humidity compensation for air temperature. STOP
608 SID250 J1587 communication bus. STOP
608/9 PPID98/9 Engine synchronisation, acknowledgement. STOP
608/9 PPID132/9 Signal from accelerator pedal. STOP
620/3 SID232/3 +5V voltage feed sensor, engine. STOP

Display
626/3 PID45/3 Sensor, inlet air heater STOP
626/4 PID45/4 Sensor, inlet air heater. STOP
626/5 PID45/5 Sensor, inlet air heater. STOP
628/2 SID240/2 Memory error in engine control. STOP
628/12 SID240/12 Memory error in engine control. STOP
629/8 SID254/8 Engine control unit, internal fault. STOP
629/12 SID254/12 Engine control unit, internal fault. STOP
630/2 SID253/2 Electrical fault engine (EEPROM). STOP
636/2 SID21/2 Sensor speed camshaft, irregular signal. The engine takes STOP
longer to start than normal.
636/3 SID21/3 Sensor speed camshaft, no signal. The engine takes STOP
longer to start than normal.
636/8 SID21/8 Sensor speed camshaft, abnormal frequency. The engine STOP
takes longer to start than normal. The engine is running
normally once it has started.
637/2 SID22/2 Flywheel speed sensor, no signal. The engine is extremely STOP
difficult to start and runs unevenly or stops.
637/3 SID22/3 Sensor speed flywheel, abnormal frequency. The engine STOP
is extremely difficult to start and runs unevenly or stops.
637/8 SID22/8 Sensor speed flywheel, irregular signal. The engine is STOP
extremely difficult to start and runs unevenly or stops.
639/2 SID231/2 Communication error control unit engine (J1939). STOP
639/9 PSID201/9 Communication error control unit engine (J1939). STOP
647/3 SID33/3 Cooling fan control. STOP
651/3 SID1/3 Injector cylinder 1. The engine has reduced power output. STOP
651/12 SID1/12 Injector cylinder 1, defective. The engine has reduced STOP
power output.
power output.

Display
power output.
power output.
power output.
power output.
677/0 PPID3/0 Start relay on the starter motor. STOP
729/3 SID70/3 Sensor preheating. STOP
729/4 SID70/4 Sensor preheating. The engine hard to start in cold STOP
weather.
729/5 SID70/5 Sensor preheating. The engine hard to start in cold STOP
weather.
858/3 PSID82/3 AdBlue external filter heater. STOP
975/3 PID26/3 Fan speed. STOP
1136/0 PPID55/0 ECU temperature, control unit too hot. STOP
1136/4 PPID55/4 ECU temperature. STOP
1136/5 PPID55/5 ECU temperature. STOP
1184/0 PID173/0 High exhaust temperature. STOP
1184/4 PID173/4 Sensor exhaust temperature. STOP

Display
1188/3 SID32/3 Wastegate, cable short-circuited to voltage. STOP
1188/3 SID32/3 Wastegate drive circuit STOP
1231/2 PSID232/2 CAN2 J1939 communication link. No AdBlue additive. STOP
1231/2 PSID248/2 CAN3 communication link. No AdBlue additive. STOP
1231/9 PSID229/9 CAN frames from UDS/ACM, timeout. No AdBlue additive. STOP
1675/0 PPID3/0 Starter motor output power (Penta). STOP
1675/10 PPID3/10 Starter motor output power (Penta) or electrical problem. STOP
1761/1 PPID278/1 After-treatment reagents, level, low level, limited cooling STOP
capacity. Temperature shown as 20 °C.
1761/3 PPID278/3 After-treatment reagents, level. SCH. Temperature shown STOP
as 20 °C.
1761/5 PPID278/5 After-treatment reagent, level. STOP
1761/11 PPID278 After-treatment reagent, level, unknown error. STOP
/11
1761/18 PPID278 After-treatment reagent, level. STOP
/18
2061/8 PSID77/8 AdBlue ECU EEPROM. STOP
2061/8 PPID273 After-treatment reagent, pressure, heating defect. STOP
/14 Reduced engine power
2061/12 PSID77/12 AdBlue ECU EEPROM. STOP
2061/13 PPID278 After-treatment reagent, level. STOP
/13
2061/14 PPID385 AdBlue ECU voltage, internal supply, critical fault. STOP
/14 SCR-system does not start.
2791/3 PPID19/3 Internal EGR status STOP
2791/4 PPID19/4 Internal EGR status STOP
2791/5 PPID19/5 Internal EGR status. STOP
2791/7 PPID19/7 Internal EGR status. STOP
2988/3 PPID332/3 Thermostat STOP
2988/4 PPID332/4 Thermostat. STOP
2988/5 PPID332/5 Thermostat. STOP
3031/0 PPID274/0 After-treatment reagent, tank temperature. No AdBlue STOP
added.
added.

Display
added.
3031/5 PPID274/5 After-treatment reagent, tank temperature, open circuit. STOP
No AdBlue added.
3051/11 PSID90/11 The SCR system's performance. STOP
3226/2 PPID270/2 NOx sensor exhaust outlet. Reduced engine power. STOP
3226/7 PPID270/7 NOx sensor exhaust outlet. Reduced engine power. STOP
3241/4 PPID386/4 Exhaust temperature sensor #1. STOP
3241/5 PPID386/5 Exhaust temperature sensor #1. STOP
3361/3 PSID89/3 AdBlue metering valve. No AdBlue added. STOP
3361/7 PSID89/7 AdBlue metering valve, valve or hose clogged. No AdBlue STOP
added.
3361/10 PSID89/10 AdBlue metering valve, valve jammed. No AdBlue added. STOP
3361/14 PSID89/14 AdBlue metering valve, frozen too many times. No AdBlue STOP
added
3363/3 PSID75/3 AdBlue tank heating valve. STOP
3464/3 PSID7/3 Actuator motor accelerator control. STOP
3511/3 PSID77/3 AdBlue ECU EEPROM. ECU inner supply high. STOP
3511/4 PSID77/4 AdBlue ECU EEPROM. ECU inner supply low. STOP
3512/13 PPID273 After-treatment reagent, pressure. Reduced engine power STOP
/13
3522/16 PSID91/16 AdBlue, consumption. STOP
3522/18 PSID91/18 AdBlue, consumption. STOP
4334/1 PPID273/1 After-treatment reagent, pressure, leakage. Warning STOP
indicator and reduced engine power. Refill AdBlue.
4334/4 PPID273/4 After-treatment reagent, pressure. Warning indicator and STOP
reduced engine power. Refill AdBlue.
4334/5 PPID273/5 After-treatment reagent, pressure. Warning indicator and STOP
reduced engine power. Refill AdBlue.
4334/7 PPID273/7 After-treatment reagent, pressure, accumulated fault. STOP
Warning indicator and reduced engine power. Refill AdBlue.
4334/9 PPID273/9 After-treatment reagent. STOP
Refill AdBlue.

Display
4334/10 PPID273 After-treatment reagent or electrical problem. Warning STOP
/10 indicator and reduced engine power. Refill AdBlue.
4334/13 PPID273 After-treatment reagent, pressure. Warning indicator and STOP
/13 reduced engine power. Refill AdBlue.
4337/0 PPID275/0 Reagent filter temperature. No AdBlue added. STOP
4354/3 PSID103/3 AdBlue ECU hose heater 1. STOP
4354/14 PSID103 AdBlue ECU hose heater 1. STOP
/14
4356/14 PSID102 AdBlue ECU hose heater 3. STOP
/14
4374/0 PSID87/0 AdBlue pump motor speed. No AdBlue added. STOP
4374/1 PSID87/1 AdBlue pump motor speed. No AdBlue added. STOP
4374/10 PSID87/10 AdBlue pump motor speed, no signal from pump. No STOP
AdBlue added.
4376/3 PSID105/3 AdBlue directional control valve. STOP
4811/1 PPID8/1 Oil pressure piston cooling. STOP
4811/2 PPID8/2 Oil pressure piston cooling, incorrect data. STOP

Display
5246/0 PSID46/0 NOx level 3, 4 or 5. Warning indication and reduced STOP
engine power.
5246/15 PSID46/15 NOx level 1 or 2. Warning indication and reduced engine STOP
power.
5246/16 PSID46/16 NOx level. STOP
5394/17 PSID90/17 SCR-system's performance, metering error. Warning STOP
indication, error message on display and reduced engine
power.
520192/1 PPID8/1 Low oil pressure piston cooling, engine has reduced STOP
performance.
520192/3 PPID8/3 Sensor, oil pressure piston cooling STOP
520194 PPID4 Starter motor input sensor. STOP
520195/5 PPID6/5 Sensor, ignition off (stop request). STOP
520195/18 PPID6/18 Sensor, ignition off (stop request). STOP
520223/3 PSID85/3 AdBlue ECU main relay. STOP

Error codes Cummins QSM11
Display
(SPN/FMI) Description Action
84/2 Speed sensor, data invalid. Engine speed limited to maximum speed WARNING
without gear.
84/10 Speed sensor, incorrect signal. Engine speed limited to maximum speed WARNING
without gear.
91/3 Accelerator pedal, cable short-circuited to voltage. The engine does STOP
not respond to throttle application.
91/4 Accelerator pedal, cable short-circuited to frame ground. The engine STOP
does not respond to throttle application.
91/8 Accelerator pedal, frequency too low. The engine does not respond to STOP
throttle application.
91/8 Accelerator pedal, frequency too high. The engine does not respond to STOP
91/19 Problem with the accelerator pedal. Engine only running at idling speed. STOP
97/3 Sensor water-in-fuel, cable short-circuited to voltage. WARNING
97/4 Sensor water in fuel, cable short-circuited to ground. WARNING
97/15 Water in fuel. Risk of reduced engine power. WARNING: Drain fuel prefilter,
see 6.2.2 Fuel system.
100/1 Low engine oil pressure. Engine power is reduced gradually, after 30 STOP: Check the oil level in the
seconds the engine is switched off. engine. See 6.2.6 Engine oil.
100/2 Sensor, oil pressure, data error. No warning for low oil pressure. WARNING
100/3 Sensor, oil pressure, cable short-circuited to voltage. No warning for WARNING
low oil pressure.
100/4 Sensor, oil pressure, cable short-circuited to ground or open circuit. No WARNING
warning for low oil pressure.
100/18 Low engine oil pressure. WARNING: Check the oil level in
the engine. See 6.2.6 Engine oil.
102/2 Sensor boost pressure indicates high boost pressure when other engine WARNING
data indicate that pressure should be low. Reduced engine power.
102/3 Sensor, boost pressure, cable short-circuited to voltage. Reduced WARNING
engine power.
102/4 Sensor, boost pressure, cable short-circuited to ground or open circuit. WARNING
Reduced engine power.
103/16 Incorrect overspeed protection for turbocharging. Reduced engine WARNING
power.
105/0 Inlet air too hot. Engine power is reduced gradually, after 30 seconds STOP
the engine is switched off.
105/3 Sensor charge-air temperature, cable short-circuited to voltage or open WARNING
circuit. No warning for high coolant temperature.
105/4 Sensor charge-air temperature, cable short-circuited to ground or open WARNING
108/2 Sensor, air pressure, data error. Reduced engine power. WARNING
108/3 Sensor, air pressure, cable short-circuited to voltage. Reduced engine WARNING
power.
108/4 Sensor, air pressure, cable short-circuited to frame ground. Reduced WARNING
engine power.
110/0 High coolant temperature. Engine power is reduced gradually, after 30 STOP: Check the coolant level.
seconds the engine is switched off. See 6.2.5 Cooling system.

Display
110/3 Sensor coolant temperature, cable short-circuited to voltage or open WARNING
110/4 Sensor coolant temperature, cable short-circuited to frame ground. No WARNING
warning for high coolant temperature.
111/1 Low coolant level. Engine power is reduced gradually, after 30 seconds STOP: Check the coolant level.
the engine is switched off. See 6.2.5 Cooling system.
111/2 Sensor coolant level, data error. No warning for low coolant level. STOP: Check the coolant level.
See 6.2.5 Cooling system.
166/2 Power difference between cylinders. Rough idling. INFORMATION
167/1 Low battery voltage. STOP
167/16 High battery voltage. WARNING
167/18 Low battery voltage or restart of engine repeatedly due to low battery WARNING
voltage.
168/16 Voltage feed to control unit engine too high. WARNING
168/18 Voltage feed to control unit engine too low. WARNING
175/0 High engine oil temperature. Engine power is reduced gradually, after 30 STOP
seconds the engine is switched off.
175/3 Sensor, oil temperature, cable short-circuited to voltage or open circuit. WARNING
No warning for high oil temperature engine.
175/4 Sensor, oil temperature, cable short-circuited to frame ground. No WARNING
warning for high oil temperature engine.
188/4 Solenoid valve 1 wastegate. Reduced engine power. WARNING
190/0 High engine speed. Fuel supply restricted until engine speed is below STOP: Use less throttle.
permitted engine speed.
190/10 Sensor, speed/ignition position, one of two signals missing. WARNING
190/2 Sensor, speed/ignition position, both signals missing. Engine stops and STOP
cannot be started.
191/16 Incorrect calibration value. Speed limitation activated. WARNING: Reduce throttle.
191/18 Speed warning for low speed. WARNING: Increase throttle.
251/2 Internal error engine control unit. INFORMATION
441/3 Extra sensor temperature, cable short-circuited to voltage. No warning WARNING
for high temperature, control unit.
441/4 Extra sensor temperature, cable short-circuited to frame ground. No WARNING
warning for high temperature.
558/13 Sensor accelerator pedal idle switch, calibration error. Engine only STOP
running at idling speed.
558/2 Sensor accelerator pedal idle switch, data error. WARNING
558/4 Sensor accelerator pedal idle switch, cable short-circuited to frame WARNING
ground. The engine does not respond to throttle application.
608/2 Communication error Control unit engine. INFORMATION
626/11 Control relay preheating. Preheating not working. WARNING
627/2 Voltage feed to control unit engine disappears without ignition off. WARNING
Reduced engine power. Difficult to start or engine stops.

Display
629/12 Internal error engine control unit. Engine does not start. STOP
629/12 Internal error engine control unit. WARNING
630/2 Internal error engine control unit. Reduced engine power. Difficult to WARNING
start or engine stops.
632/3 Solenoid valve fuel shut-off, cable short-circuited to voltage. WARNING
632/4 Solenoid valve fuel shut-off, cable short-circuited to frame ground. STOP
Engine is switched off.
639/9 Communication error Control unit engine. WARNING
639/13 Communication error Control unit engine. WARNING
644/2 Accelerator pedal, sensor outside valid range. Engine is switched off. WARNING
647/4 Fan clutch, cable short-circuited to frame ground. Cooling fan constantly WARNING
activated.
651/5 Electrical problem, injector cylinder 1. Engine only runs on 5 cylinders, WARNING
has reduced power.
has reduced power.
has reduced power.
has reduced power.
has reduced power.
has reduced power.
has reduced power.
has reduced power.
has reduced power.
has reduced power.
has reduced power.
has reduced power.
702/3 Extra input/output 2, cable short-circuited to voltage. WARNING
703/3 Extra input/output 2, cable short-circuited to voltage. WARNING
974/3 Extra accelerator pedal, cable short-circuited to voltage. The engine STOP
does not respond to throttle application.
974/4 Extra accelerator pedal, cable short-circuited to frame ground. The STOP
engine does not respond to throttle application.
974/19 Problem with the accelerator pedal. The engine does not respond to STOP

Display
1043/3 Accelerator pedal reference voltage, short-circuited to voltage. The WARNING
engine is running at idling speed.
1043/4 Accelerator pedal reference voltage, short-circuited to frame ground. WARNING
The engine is running at idling speed.
1072/11 Signal engine brake 1, short-circuited to ground. WARNING
1073/11 Signal engine brake 2, short-circuited to ground. WARNING
1079/3 Reference voltage, short-circuited to voltage. Reduced engine power. WARNING
1079/4 Reference voltage, short-circuited to frame ground. Reduced engine WARNING
power.
1080/3 Reference voltage to sensor short-circuited to voltage. Reduced engine WARNING
power. No warning for low oil pressure or low coolant level.
1080/4 Reference voltage to sensor short-circuited to frame ground. Reduced WARNING
engine power. No warning for low oil pressure or low coolant level.
1265/4 Solenoid valve oil-burn, cable short-circuited to ground. WARNING
1319/2 Incorrect value sensor boost pressure. Reduced engine power. WARNING
1377/2 Error in control unit transmission. WARNING
1380/17 Low oil level engine. INFORMATION: Check the oil
level in the engine. See 6.2.6
Engine oil.
1383/31 Engine overheated. INFORMATION: Switch off
engine with ignition key lock.
1384/31 Engine shutdown. WARNING: Switch off engine
with ignition key lock.
1387/3 Extra sensor pressure, cable short-circuited to voltage. No warning for WARNING
oil pressure.
1387/4 Extra sensor pressure, cable short-circuited to frame ground. No warning WARNING
for oil pressure.
1484/31 Error codes in other control units. INFORMATION

Error codes transmission

Error codes from the transmission generally have error code level
"WARNING", but error codes from the transmission can specify another
error code level in accordance with the action column in the table below.
Error codes ZF 5WG261
Display ZF ZF Description Action

(SPN/FMI) code code
(dec) (hex)
5110/3 37 25 Sensor oil temperature sump transmission. -
511074 38 26 Sensor oil temperature sump transmission. -
5120/3 39 27 Sensor oil temperature transmission. -
5120/4 40 28 Sensor oil temperature transmission. -
5140/3 49 31 Sensor engine rpm. Difficult gear shifting. -
5150/3 52 34 Sensor rpm turbine. Difficult gear shifting. WARNING: Stop the
If any error code with SPN 5170 is generated at the machine, select neutral.
same time then the transmission shifts to neutral position Reselect the gear.
(Limp-home).
(Limp-home).
(Limp-home).
5160/3 55 37 Sensor rpm drum. Difficult gear shifting. -
5170/3 58 3A Sensor rpm output shaft. Difficult gear shifting. WARNING: Stop the
(Limp-home).
5170/4 59 3B Sensor rpm output shaft. Difficult gear shifting. WARNING: Stop the
(Limp-home).
5170/12 60 3C Sensor rpm output shaft. Difficult gear shifting. WARNING: Stop the
(Limp-home).
5180/2 62 3E Sensor rpm output shaft. Difficult gear shifting. WARNING: Stop the
(Limp-home).
5260/9 84 54 CAN-message Control unit KID (D795) -
5270/9 85 55 CAN-message Control unit cab (D790-1) -


(SPN/FMI) code code
(dec) (hex)
5280/9 86 56 CAN-message Control unit engine (D794). Difficult gear -
shifting.
5310/2 89 59 Logic error, CAN-messages. -
5390/2 97 61 Incorrect CAN-messages. -
5480/3 113 71 Solenoid valve clutch K1. Transmission shifts to neutral WARNING: Stop the
(Limp-home). machine, select neutral.
In the event of faults on multiple clutches: Transmission Reselect the gear.
locked in neutral position (shut-down).


(SPN/FMI) code code
(dec) (hex)
5520/3 132 84 Solenoid valve clutch KV. Transmission shifts to neutral WARNING: Stop the
5530/3 135 87 Solenoid valve clutch KR. Transmission shifts to neutral WARNING: Stop the
5660/2 177 B1 Clutch K1 slips. Transmission shifts to neutral position WARNING: Stop the
(limp-home). machine, select neutral.
5680/2 181 B5 Clutch KV slips. Transmission shifts to neutral position WARNING: Stop the


(SPN/FMI) code code
(dec) (hex)
5685/2 182 B6 Clutch KR slips. Transmission shifts to neutral position WARNING: Stop the
5700/0 183 B7 Transmission oil temperature sump above 100 °C. WARNING: Note the
error and try to reduce
temperature in torque
converter by operating
calmly.
5730/0 186 BA Sensor transmission oil filter (B755-5). Change oil filter.
5745/15 188 BC Speed limitation exceeded. -
5755/15 194 C2 Torque limit input shaft too high. -
5760/0 195 C3 Transmission oil temperature torque converter above WARNING: Stop the
120 °C. machine, engage neutral,
and apply full throttle
(limited to 50%) to cool
the transmission oil so
that temperature drops
below 100 °C.
When temperature in
torque converter is below
100 °C, resume work with
machine.
5810/3 209 D1 Voltage feed to sensor. -
5810/4 210 D2 Voltage feed to sensor. -
5820/4 211 D3 Low battery voltage. Transmission locked in neutral Check alternator and
position (shut-down). battery as well as cable
harness between battery
and alternator.
5820/3 212 D4 High battery voltage.Transmission locked in neutral Check alternator and
position (shut-down). battery.
If equipment for assisted
start is connected,
disconnect it.
5830/2 213 D5 Solenoid valve VPS 1. Transmission locked in neutral -
(shutdown).
5840/2 214 D6 Solenoid valve VPS 2. Transmission locked in neutral -
(shutdown).
5860/3 227 E3 Incorrect CAN-messages. Transmission shifts to neutral WARNING: Stop the
Reselect the gear.
Reselect the gear.
Reselect the gear.
Reselect the gear.


(SPN/FMI) code code
(dec) (hex)
5890/2 241 F1 Memory error, Transmission control unit (D793). -
Transmission locked in neutral position (shut-down).
5900/13 242 F2 Software error, Transmission control unit (D793). -
5910/13 243 F3 Software error, Transmission control unit (D793). -
5930/7 245 F5 Clutch error during calibration. Transmission locked in -
neutral position (shut-down).
5930/13 246 F6 Calibration data incorrect. -
Control unit transmission can generate two states with reduced

functionality to protect the transmission in the event of serious
malfunctions:
• "Limp-home"
In this condition only gear 1-2 in each direction can be used. When
the error occurs the transmission shifts to neutral position. To
continue, set the travel direction selector to neutral position and
select the travel direction again.
• "Shutdown"
In this mode the transmission is permanently in neutral to protect
the transmission.

138 5 Handling – Operating
5.4 Operating
5.4.1 While operating
General
DANGER
The machine's work area is large and visibility from
the operator's cab is restricted.
damage!
Keep in mind:
• Always check that no persons are in the way of the
machine or its equipment. Also check that the area
upwards is free. If there are unauthorised persons
or vehicles within the work area then the machine
must be stopped.
• The operator must always face in the travel
direction and should operate with special care
where persons or vehicles may appear.
• The operator must adapt the speed to the load and
ground conditions, visibility, and wind conditions,
etc.
• The operator must pay extra attention and operate
with special care near electric power lines,
viaducts, docksides, ramps, doorways, etc.
• Always operate carefully so that the attachment
does not collide with posts, power lines, etc.
• Use available visibility-enhancing equipment such
as rear view mirrors and camera ( ).
WARNING
inspection.
WARNING
Never operate the machine without wearing the
seatbelt.
Extreme danger!
Always use the seatbelt when operating the machine,
even when you expect a short shift. The seatbelt must
not be modified.

5 Handling – While operating 139
Instructions
Make a habit of checking the following at regular intervals while
operating:
• that all gauges are within normal range, optimum operating value is
when the indicator needle is in the centre of the normal operating
range (straight up).
• that fuel indicator on the display shows that there is fuel in the tank.
• that the AdBlue indicator on the display shows that there is AdBlue
in the tank. Applies to machines with Volvo TAD 1360VE.
• that all warning lights are off.
• that horn, lighting, brake lights and direction indicators function
correctly.
• that all hydraulic functions function correctly.
• that no error codes have been generated (shown on operator's
display with error code indication and symbol). See 5.3 Error
codes, page 97.
When necessary, the control system can set speed limitations for the
machine. This happens in the event of the following:
• high load on the steering axle
• high oil temperature in the brake oil
• lock of tilt, see Tilting, page 168
• lock of levelling, see Levelling, page 168
• pressed down control breaker
• transport with bottom lift, see 5.5.2 Transporting load, page 160
• raised cab, see Hydraulic vertically adjustable cab, page 172 .
Automatic stop function

The automatic stop function means that the engine is switched off
automatically when certain conditions are met.
The automatic function monitors special conditions (see below), and

when all are met it starts a countdown before the engine is stopped.
During the countdown, the event menu for the automatic stop function
is shown in the display. The bar in the menu shows the remaining time
to stop as a percentage of the delay time. When the bar is filled the
017366
engine is stopped. The countdown can be interrupted by breaking any

of the conditions for auto-stop. The delay time can be changed by a
Event menu automatic stop function service technician.
Conditions for auto-stopping the engine:

• Machine has reached operating temperature.
• Battery charging status is OK.
• Machine stationary in neutral position at idling speed.
• Load handling functions inactive.
• Parking brake is activated.
When the engine has been stopped automatically, the engine must be
started in the normal way, see 5.4.2 Starting engine, page 142.
A service technician can activate the automatic stop function for Normal
and Power operating modes.
If the machine is equipped with the automatic start and stop function
then the function will apply ahead of the automatic stop function, see
Automatic start and stop function, page 140.

140 5 Handling – While operating
Automatic start and stop function
The automatic start and stop function means that the engine is stopped
when the machine is considered to be inactive and the engine is started
automatically when work is resumed.
The automatic function monitors special conditions (see below), and

when all are met it starts a countdown before the engine is stopped.
017366
During the countdown, the event menu for the automatic stop function
is shown in the display. The bar in the menu shows the remaining time
Event menu automatic stop function to stop as a percentage of the delay time. When the bar is fully filled,
the engine is stopped. The countdown can be interrupted by breaking
any of the conditions for auto-stop. The delay time can be set by a
service technician.
Conditions for auto-stopping the engine:

• The machine has operating temperature.
• Battery charging status is OK.
• The operator is sitting in the seat.
• The machine is stationary at idling speed in neutral position
• Load handling functions inactive.
If the parking brake is activated manually (with the control) the bar in
the display is filled immediately, and the engine is stopped immediately.
When the engine is auto-stopped the parking brake is activated

automatically (without the need to move the control). If the engine is
auto-started by depressing the brake pedal then the parking brake
is released.
When the engine has been auto-stopped and is in standby for

automatic start then event menu automatic start function is shown.
If one of the doors is opened then the automatic start function is

temporarily disengaged (the event menu is switched off) until the door
is closed (the event menu is shown again).
NOTE
017365
The automatic start function is disengaged if the operator leaves

the seat. When this takes place, the event menu for the automatic
Event menu automatic start function start function disappears and the engine must be started with the
start button.
When the event menu for the automatic start function is shown, the
engine can be started by means of the following:
• The accelerator pedal is depressed.
• The brake pedal is depressed.
If the gear selector is in neutral position then the parking brake is
released when the engine is started by means of depressing the
brake pedal.
• Load handling function is activated.
• The start button is depressed.
The machine has a timer for how long the ignition can be activated
after the engine has been auto-stopped. If this time expires then the
ignition is switched off in the same way as during in normal shutdown,
see 5.4.2 Starting engine, page 142. The time for automatic shutdown
of the ignition can be changed by a service technician.

5 Handling – While operating 141
Eco Drive Mode

Eco Drive Mode consists of functions for reducing fuel consumption
and thereby environmental impact.
Eco Drive Mode contains three operating modes for how the machine's
fuel-saving functions should operate.
Depending on options, the operating mode can be set via customer

settings, see Setting of Eco Drive Mode, page 178.
Power
• No limitations activated.
• Automatic stop function, see Automatic stop function, page
139. Can be changed by a service technician.
Normal
• Operator guidance, stage 1.
• Performance loss, stage 1.
• Engine limited to idling speed in neutral position and passive
machine.
• Automatic stop function, see Automatic stop function, page
139. Can be changed by a service technician.
ECO
• Operator guidance, stage 2.
• Performance loss, stage 2.
• Engine limited to idling speed in neutral position and passive
machine.
• Automatic stop function, see Automatic stop function, page 139.
If the machine is equipped with the automatic start and stop function
the automatic start and stop functions will apply throughout the Eco
Drive Mode, see Automatic start and stop function, page 140.

142 5 Handling – Starting engine
5.4.2 Starting engine

General
WARNING
If it's difficult to start the engine, do not use start spray.
Risk of explosion!
In case of start problems, contact service.
Instructions
1. If the machine is equipped with auxiliary heater, disconnect the
electrical cable from the machine .
2. Set the travel direction selector in neutral position or in the position
for activated parking brake.
The travel direction selector must be in neutral position or in the
position for activated parking brake, otherwise it is not possible
to start the engine.
3. Turn the ignition key lock to operating position, position I.
Current is now supplied to all electrical functions.
4. If the machine is equipped with an alcolock, blow in the alcolock .
The alcolock calculates the amount of alcohol in the breath.
In the event of a successful breath test, proceed as follows:
5. Press the start button and hold depressed until the starter motor
starts, release the start button when the engine starts.
When needed, the engine's control unit activates preheating during
a time period. The event menu for preheating indicates whether
preheating is activated, see Event menu preheating, description,
page 85.
Engine alternative Cummins QSM11 has automatic preheating
without indicator to the operator.
NOTE
The starter motor can be activated 20-30 seconds then the circuit
cuts 1.5 to 2 minutes so the starter motor has time to cool. This
is to protect the starter motor.

5 Handling – Warming up 143
5.4.3 Warming up
General
CAUTION
Never rev a cold engine at high engine speeds.
Risk of engine damage!
Run the engine at 1400-1500 rpm until it starts to get
warm.
WARNING
Don't let the engine idle for a long time.
Risk of engine damage!
Turn off the engine during breaks in operation and
load handling.
Instructions
Engine
In cold temperatures the machine may not be used for tough work until
the engine and hydraulics are at operating temperature.
If the machine often needs to be cold started below -10 °C then an

engine heater and hydraulic oil heater should be installed.
Start the engine and let it idle for about 10 min, never rev a cold engine
as this can cause engine damage. Now warm run the engine at about
1400-1500 rpm until it starts to get warm. It is very important that the
engine is warmed up and the oil circulates well before the turbocharger
starts to operate at high revs.
Start working with the machine when the coolant has reached normal
operating temperature, approx. 75 °C, see Engine operating menu,
description, page 71.
Transmission
A cold transmission will not shift at temperatures below -12 °C. The
transmission must be warmed up. Follow the instructions for warming
up the engine.
Hydraulic system
Never operate a hydraulic function in the cold until the hydraulic oil is
warm, since there is a risk of damage and leakage in the hydraulic
system.
When the engine has reached its working temperature, warm run the
hydraulic oil by running the mast slowly up and down. Full actuation of
the hydraulic function may not be performed until the tank temperature
is +1 °C.

144 5 Handling – Gearshifting
After this, all other hydraulic functions should be run slowly so that
warm oil circulates through the whole system, and this should be
repeated at least ten times.
NOTE
Hydraulic functions and the steering may feel sticky when the oil
is cold.
5.4.4 Gearshifting
General
The machine is equipped with an automatic transmission. The system
shifts to a lower/higher gear under certain conditions, such as torque,
30
engine speed, travel speed, etc.
A cold transmission will not shift at temperatures below -12 °C. The
transmission must be warmed up, see warming up 5.4.3 Warming
up, page 143.
General about the automatic transmission:

• The transmission is locked in neutral position when the operator is
not sitting in the seat, see Transmission assumes neutral position,
page 146.
• Has a built-in control system, providing optimised operation.
013489
32 31 33 • Shows current gear on the control system display.

• The reversing lock prevents the travel direction being changed too
30. Switch for upshift
quickly, i.e. prevents possible damage to the transmission. The
31. Switch for downshift reversing lock is automatic and is dependent on engine speed
and travel speed.
32. Switch for automatic shifting • Shifting is variable (modulated) and gives smoother operation.
33. Travel direction indicator, Forward Neutral Normally start-up takes place in second gear. Use of first gear is
Reverse governed by engine speed, amongst other things.
Instructions
1 Deactivate the parking brake by first depressing the service brake
pedal and then move the travel direction selector from the parking
brake position to neutral/gear position.
2 Let the engine run at idle speed. Select travel direction.
a) Travel direction selector
Move the lever (position a):
• forward (F) for travel direction forward.
• reverse (R) for travel direction reverse.
• downwards or upwards (N) for neutral.
a
015234

5 Handling – Gearshifting 145
b) Travel direction selector on control for load handling

Move the switch (position b):
b • forward (F) for travel direction forward.
016970
c) Travel direction selector on mini steering wheel or joystick
Move the switch (position c):
• forward (F) for travel direction forward.
c
3 Select automatic or manual shifting:
015435
Automatic shifting
1 Activate automatic shifting with the switch for automatic shifting A
(position 32). The system automatically shifts between all gears.
2 Automatic shifting is disengaged if the switch for upshift or
downshift (position 30, 31) is activated.
Manual shifting
1 Machine gearshifting takes place manually with the switch for
upshift or downshift (position 30, 31). The current gear is shown
on the display.
NOTE
In certain circumstances, the transmission may be forced to
reduce speed due to a problem. The control unit may then set the
transmission in "limp home" mode.
CAUTION
Changing the travel direction must be done with care.
The machine has a reversing lock as standard but
transmission service life is increased if change of
travel direction takes place at a lower travel speed and
engine speed.
Risk of machine damage! Axles may fail!
Change of travel direction must take place within the
limitations set by the reversing lock.

146 5 Handling – Steering
Transmission assumes neutral position

A control breaker senses when the operator leaves the operator's
station. The signal from the control breaker means that the transmission
automatically assumes neutral position. It is not possible to select any
travel direction.
NOTE
If the buzzer sounds when the operator sits in the seat and releases
the parking brake then the control breaker in the seat may be
malfunctioning. It is not possible to select any travel direction. The
function of the switch in the driver's seat must be checked.
The event menu appears if the driver's seat is left without the parking
brake being activated, see The event menu parking brake not activated
and no operator in the driver's seat, description, page 77.
017486
Switch in driver's seat
5.4.5 Steering
General
The machine is equipped with servo steering. The steering wheel
movements are transferred hydraulically to the steering wheels on
the ground.
WARNING
The machine may not roll on a downhill grade if the
engine is off.
Hydraulic pressure for steering is missing and steering
capacity is lost! Danger!
Keep the engine running for hydraulic pressure.

5 Handling – Service brake 147
5.4.6 Service brake

General
The brake pedal (position 12) used as service brake.
Use the brakes in a smooth but firm way. Brake pressure remains for
awhile after the engine has been switched off, accumulated during
operation. If the accumulator pressure drops below a certain level then
the event menu shows low accumulator pressure. When the event
menu is shown the capacity of the service brake is limited. The buzzer
sounds and speed is limited. Finally, the parking brake is applied
automatically by a forceful spring in the brake cylinder. Check the
11 accumulators' sealing integrity if the pressure does not build up and is
not maintained, see chapter 6 Inspection and maintenance.
015214
12
The service brake is combined with the declutching pedal. The drive is
declutched completely at a certain brake pressure.
11. Accelerator
12. Brake pedal
5.4.7 Parking brake

General
DANGER
or extreme danger!
WARNING
Never leave the operator's station without first applying
the parking brake.
Risk of machine starting to roll! Danger!
Apply the parking brake before leaving the operator's
station.
The parking brake is operated with the travel direction selector (position
1) on the steering wheel panel. Activate the parking brake by lifting
the control upward toward the steering wheel and then forward to
the parking brake position. The indicator light for the parking brake
(position 16) is lit red when the parking brake is applied and the event
menu appears, see Event menu parking brake, description, page 80.
To be able to deactivate the parking brake there must be an

accumulated brake pressure or the engine is started in order to reach
the brake pressure required when depressing the brake pedal.

148 5 Handling – Parking brake
Instructions
The parking brake is applied when:
• When the travel direction selector is moved to the position for the
parking brake (parking brake indicator light is lit red) and the event
menu for parking brake applied is shown, see Event menu parking
brake, description, page 80.
• The ignition is switched off (ignition key lock to 0 position).
When the machine is started again the parking brake is applied
without the travel direction selector being in the position for
activated parking brake. The indicator light for the parking brake
flashes to indicate that the parking brake must be activated and
deactivated with the travel direction selector to release the parking
brake. The light flashes even if the service brake is not activated at
the same time as you try to release the parking brake, even the
event menu is shown, see Event menu release the parking brake,
1 description, page 84.
015215
Check the sealing integrity of the accumulators if pressure is not

built up and maintained, see 6 Inspection and maintenance, page
1. Travel direction selector and parking brake 186.
An audible signal is activated if the operator gets up from the driver's

seat without first applying the parking brake and the event menu is
shown, The event menu parking brake not activated and no operator in
the driver's seat, description, page 77.
If the accumulator pressure drops below a certain level an error code is

shown on the display. The capacity of the service brake is restricted
with a low accumulator pressure error code. If the accumulator
pressure drops further, the parking brake is applied automatically by a
strong spring in the brake cylinder.
If the machine needs to be moved, see 7 Transporting the machine,

page 223.
Emergency brake
The parking brake can be used as emergency brake in emergency
situations.
CAUTION
The parking brake can be used as an EMERGENCY
BRAKE.
Brake shoe linings wear out and lose their braking
performance! Risk of unwanted movement by the
parked machine!
After emergency braking with the parking brake the
brake shoe linings must be checked as soon as
possible and replaced if necessary. Braking action of
the parking brake may be lost as the brake shoe linings
may have been worn down.
If the parking brake has been released mechanically
then it must always be reset to restore the machine's

5 Handling – Parking brake 149
DANGER
or extreme danger!

150 5 Handling – Heating / Air conditioning
5.4.8 Heating / Air conditioning

General
The heating/air conditioning system (ECC) obtains heat from the
38 39 40 43 engine's cooling system and provides heat when the engine is warm,
the cooling function is generated by the cooling compressor.
37 If necessary, the air conditioning can be controlled manually with the

switches for the fan, heating and air distribution. In addition to this there
36 are functions for recirculation and defroster.
In the event of an open door, the air conditioning's cooling compressor

35 is switched off (cooling function and air drying stop). Close the door
and the cooling function is activated again.
012820 NOTE
41 42 44 45 46
Open windows disrupt air conditioning function and capacity.
Panel for heating and air conditioning system
NOTE
Paper and similar located on the inner front panel can significantly
reduce air conditioning function and performance.
Setting the heating/air conditioning system

1 Activate automatic regulation of the air conditioning (position 39)
to achieve optimal function of the system.
Fan speed, temperature control and air distribution in the cab take
place automatically.
2 Set desired temperature (position 41, 42).
Set the temperature within temperature range 16 °C to 28 °C. See
temperature in display.
Setting of min. and max. respectively, shuts off automatic climate
control (control of fan, temperature and air distribution) and sets
the heat valve in min. (LO) and max. (HI) position respectively.
Cooling is activated/deactivated with the switch for cooling
(position 43).
3 Align the panel nozzles as follows:
• in cold weather, aim the panel nozzles against the windows,
• in hot weather, aim the panel nozzles upwards.
4 Manual setting of the fan's capacity is performed with the switch
for the fan (position 38, 40). Return to automatic control with the
switch (position 39).
Manual control is possible in five steps from Off to Max. Fan speed
is indicated by a bar in the operating menu.
NOTE
When the fan is switched off all functions for heating/air
conditioning are stopped.
NOTE
When setting the fan capacity manually, automatic control of the
fan is stopped.
5 Manual setting of air distribution is performed using the switch for

air distribution (position 44, 45, 46).
NOTE
When setting the air distribution manually, automatic control of
the air distribution is stopped.

5 Handling – Heating / Air conditioning 151
6 Normally, recirculation (position 36) and defroster (position 37)

do not have to be used.
Mist on windows
WARNING
Misting on the windscreens can lead to limited visibility
from the cab.
damage!
Make sure the windscreens are free of mist before
using the machine.
1 Set a warm temperature (position 41). Ideally use the defroster

function.
2 Set a fan speed to a faster position (position 40).
3 Direct air distribution (position 46) and panel nozzles to the
windscreen for good visibility through the windows.
4 Check that recirculation (position 36) is not engaged. Recirculation
may impair effective demisting.
5 Activate defroster (position 37).
The defroster controls the function fan, temperature and damper
015236
position to optimally heat and more quickly dry the air at the
windscreen for faster demisting. The function is active for 6
A minutes.
A NOTE
A. Panel nozzles The defroster function is active for 6 minutes. Check that
temperature control returns to the set value when the defroster
is switched off.
6 If there is a lot of mist, direct the panel nozzles to the windscreen

for optimal demisting.
The cooling function will be active and help to dry the air.

152 5 Handling – Heating / Air conditioning
Setting the diesel heater

Direct start of heater
A B C The diesel heater is controlled by a separate timer with display, fitted

D in the cab. Running time and up to three activation times can be set
using the timer.
D
Mo
Tu
When the heater is not running or the machine's lighting is switched
We
Th off, the timer reverts to standby mode after 10 seconds, if no button is
Fr
Sa
Su depressed. Press the off/on button to wake the display.
O E
K
Direct start of heater
017917
G F 1. Wake the timer by pressing the off/on button (position G).
2. Press the front / rear (position D) until the heater symbol flashes in
A. Application bar the menu bar (position B).
B. Menu bar 3. Press OK (position E), the message field (position C) shows
C. Message field running time, and the heater symbol is shown in the status bar
(position F).
D. Front / rear
E. OK Setting the timer (1 - 3)
F. Status bar 1. Wake the timer by pressing the off/on button (position G).
G. Off / On 2. Press front / rear (position D) until the P-symbol flashes in the
menu bar (position B). Confirm the selection with OK (position E).
3. Set memory (1 - 3) with front / rear (position D), confirm with OK
(position E). The memory is indicated by a flashing number in the
application bar (position A).
4. Set day of the week with front / rear (position D), confirm with
OK (position E). The day of the week is indicated by the flashing
abbreviation in the application bar (position A).
5. Set start time (hour) with front / rear (position D), confirm with OK
(position E). The setting is indicated by the flashing hour in the
message field (position C).
6. Set start time (minutes) with front/rear (position D), confirm with
OK (position E). The setting is indicated by the flashing minutes in
the message field (position C).
7. Set the function with front / rear (position D), confirm with OK
(position E). The function is indicated by a flashing symbol in the
status bar (position F).
Normally, the heater is preset and only needs to be confirmed with
OK.
8. Set the desired running time with front / rear (position D), confirm
with OK (position E). The running time is indicated by the flashing
time in the message field (position C).
Normally, the running time is set and only needs to be confirmed
with OK.
Setting the clock
1. Wake the timer by pressing the off/on button (position G).
2. Press front / rear (position D) until the clock symbol flashes in the
message field (position B). Confirm the selection with OK (position
E).
3. Set day of the week with front / rear (position D), confirm with
OK (position E). The day of the week is indicated by the flashing
abbreviation in the application bar (position A).
4. Set hour with front / rear (position D), confirm with OK (position E).
The setting is indicated by the flashing hour in the message field
(position C).
5. Set minutes with front / rear (position D), confirm with OK (position
E). The setting is indicated by the flashing minutes in the message
field (position C).
6. Set running time with front / rear (position D), confirm with OK
(position E). The setting is indicated by the flashing time in the
message field (position C).

5 Handling – Stopping the engine - parking 153
Switching off timer start

1. Wake the timer by pressing the off/on button (position G).
2. Press front / rear (position D) until the P-symbol flashes in the
menu bar (position B). Confirm the selection with OK (position E).
3. Set memory (1 - 3) with front / rear (position D), confirm with OK
(position E). The memory is indicated by a flashing number in the
application bar (position A).
4. Press front / rear (position D) until OFF is shown in the message
field (position C). Confirm the selection with OK (position E).
Switching off the heater when it is active
1. Press the front / rear (position D) until the heater symbol flashes in
the menu bar (position B).
2. Press OK (position E).
5.4.9 Stopping the engine - parking

General
NOTE
Never disconnect the system voltage with the battery disconnector
when the engine is running! The voltage regulator may be
damaged.
WARNING
Always turn off the electric power when the machine is
left, e.g. when parking or at the end of the shift.
Risk of fire!
Turn off the electric power with the battery
disconnector.
Instructions
1. Stop the machine and set the travel direction selector in the
position for parking brake.
2. Run in the boom completely and lower it to its lowest position.
3. With hydraulic cab sliding or hydraulic vertical cab adjustment :
Run the cab back to its starting position.
4. Let the engine run 1 minute at idle speed before stopping the
engine so that the engine cools down slightly and the turbo
bearings are lubricated.
5. Stop the engine by turning the ignition key lock to position 0.
If the start button (position 15) is pressed for more than one second
when the engine is already running then just the engine is stopped.
If the machine is going to be parked for a long time, e.g. after a
work shift is over, then the battery disconnector should be turned
to the OFF (0) position.
For machines with Volvo engines:
NOTE
Wait for two minutes before the system voltage is disconnected with
the battery disconnector so that the SCR system has time to fully
drain, this is particularly important in cold weather.
Certain machines are equipped with automatic engine stop:

• In case the operator leaves the machine for some time without
stopping the engine, normally 10 minutes.

154 5 Handling – Load handling
5.5 Load handling

General
During all lifting work, make sure that the max. lift capacity is not
exceeded, see machine plate or load diagram.
The machine's capacity is indicated by two parameters:

• number of containers in height
• load size and its centre of gravity in relation to the machine
The capacity varies between different models and versions, see

machine and type plates 3.2 Plates, page 25.
It is important to estimate the position of the centre of gravity. If the

machine appears to be side-heavy, the load should be lowered and
adjusted with side shift so that the load's centre of gravity is moved to a
position along the machine's centre line.
The function load handling refers to, e.g., to lift, lower, rotate, angle or
hold loads. Load handling also includes auxiliary functions to handle
the load, e.g. rotation stop.
Load handling subfunctions.

015596
• Lift/lower
015597
Lift and lower
• Extension
015598
Extension
• Side shift
001113
Side shift
• Spreading (positioning)
Automatic spreading 20' to 40'
30' stop
001114
Spreading (positioning)

5 Handling – Load handling 155
• Rotation
Rotation stop ±25°
016202
Rotation
• Damping
Damping with tilt lock
Damping with adjustable tilt
Damping with adjustable tilt and tilt lock
016203
Tilt
• Mechanical levelling ±5°

Hydraulic levelling
001117
Levelling
• Twistlocks
004868
Twistlocks
Overload system
The machine is equipped with a warning system, LLMC (Longitudinal
Load Moment Control). Warning systems must ALWAYS be functional!
The system is used for stationary load handling, so that the machine's
forward stability is not jeopardised.
When the machine approaches the stability limit, the following takes
place:
• buzzer in the cab sounds (indication to operator)
See 2.1 Safety and emergency equipment, page 8.
• warning figure is shown on the display (indication to operator)
See Event menu overload, description, page 76.
• boom movement is interrupted.
In this position the boom, and thus the load, can only be retracted
until the buzzer stops sounding and the display figure disappears.
NOTE
Retract the boom completely before it is lowered! Applies for all
load handling!
LLMC is not intended for controlling lateral stability or stability during

operation. In addition, it does not take sloping ground conditions into
consideration.
For advice on the handling of the machine, see 2.4 Keep in mind,
page 11.

156 5 Handling – Lifting load
5.5.1 Lifting load

General
There are two types of attachments which differ in lift handling:
• top lift attachment
For a top lift attachment, the attachment must be aligned with all
four corners against the container both when locking and releasing
the twistlocks. When releasing, the container must also stand
securely with all four corners on the ground surface.
• bottom lift attachment
For a bottom lift attachment, all four legs must be in clamping
position and be aligned with the load before starting to lift.
WARNING
Do not use a machine where the indicator lights are
out of order.
Danger of reduced safety during load handling!
If the indicator lights don't work, stop work with the
machine and repair.
WARNING
The machine's load capacity is limited!
It is forbidden to exceed the machine's load capacity.
See the rating plate and load diagrams. The machine's
stability limit can be exceeded if the overloading
system is not working.

5 Handling – Lifting load 157
Instructions for top lift attachment
NOTE
1 Run towards the stack of containers, as close as possible. Strive

A B C to line up the machine's centre with the centre of the container.
2 Hold the machine stationary with the service brake. Alternatively,
apply the parking brake if required and/or shift to neutral.
3
If necessary, move the cab forward/up for better visibility for
positioning the load, see Hydraulic sliding cab, page 171 or
Hydraulic vertically adjustable cab, page 172
016206
4 Position the attachment slightly above the container. Adjust with

A B C rotation, side shift and boom in/out.
5 Set spreading to container length in question.
Right light, C - Twistlocks unlocked, red light illuminates, indicates
that load is not secured.
6
Use adjustable tilt or hydraulic levelling in order to move the
attachment parallel with the load, see Tilting, page 168 and
Levelling, page 168.
016207
7 Lower the attachment on the container.

A B C
The display shows the event menu for contact and indicates when
one to three twistlocks have contact.
Lowering speed is dampened automatically when the
attachment approaches the container.
8 Middle light, B – Contact, orange light activated, indicates when
all four corner boxes have correct contact against the container,
event menu contact is switched off.
9 Lock twistlocks with the switch for twistlocks (position 58).
016208
If automatic locking of twistlocks is used, locking is automatic when

the attachment is in contact with the load.
Locking alternative is selected with the switch for automatic or
manual locking (position 58).
NOTE
For automatic locking of twistlocks, the parking brake must be
released.

158 5 Handling – Lifting load
10 Right light, C - Twistlocks unlocked, off.

Left light, A - Twistlocks locked, illuminates with green light and
indicates that load is secured and ready for lifting.
The lift function is disengaged when both right light, C - Twistlocks
unlocked, and left light, A - Twistlocks locked, are off. Left light, A -
Twistlocks locked, is activated with green light when the locking
process has been completed.
CAUTION
Do not start to lift if light C "Twistlocks unlocked" is
on, or if any of the lights A "Twistlocks locked" or B
"Contact" are off.
The load is not secured!
Try to lock twistlocks once again.
11 Ready for lifting.

When the container is lifted, the light for contact (position B)
should go out. Use side shift to centre the load so that its lateral
point-of-gravity is along the machine's centre line.
Instructions for bottom lift attachment
1 Lower the rear leg pair.

D E H I
Light I – Front leg pair raised, white light activated, indicates that
F G J K front leg pair is raised.
2
3 Place the attachment's rear lift shoes slightly under the load.
Adjust with rotation, side shift and boom in/out.
4
016209
Use adjustable tilt or hydraulic levelling in order to move the

attachment parallel with the load, see Tilting, page 168 and
5 Run forward towards the load until clamp position rear leg pair
is indicated. When the rear legs are folded down and bottom lift
attachment switch, rear legs (position 55) is pressed and held
during the entire movement, the legs stop in the vertically lift
position. Strive to line up the machine's centre with the centre
of the load.
Light J – Clamping position rear leg pair, orange light activated,
indicates when rear leg pair has clamping position against load.
After the clamping position has been opened the switch must be
activated again for the legs to be vertical.

5 Handling – Lifting load 159
6 Hold the machine stationary with the service brake. Alternatively,

D E H I apply the parking brake if required and/or shift to neutral.
F G J K
016210
7 Lower front leg pair.
D E H I
Light K – Front leg pair lowered, orange light activated, indicates
F G J K that legs are lowered.
8 Secure load by setting legs in clamping position.
Lights H and J – Clamping position front and rear leg pair, yellow
lights activated, indicate clamping position.
Light K indicates that front legs are lowered.
016211
9 Ready for lifting.

D E H I
Lights H, I, J and K are off at full contact of rear leg pair against the
F G J K load, that is, lights H and J – Clamping position front and rear leg
pair, and light K – Front legs lowered, go off.
NOTE
When lifting, the lamps D, E, F and G must come on within 4
seconds, otherwise the lifting attempt is stopped. Lower the load.
The lamps D, E, F and G must be unactuated before a new lifting
attempt is started.
016212
Instructions for lifting with "slings"

Attachment points or hooks are located at each twistlock/corner box
on the attachment. These are used for handling with lifting "slings".
Maximum weight for lifting with "slings" is 45 tonnes.
Bear in mind the following when lifting with "slings":

• The equipment used to lift with "slings" must be correctly
Max 15˚
dimensioned as well as approved for such usage and for the load
to be lifted.
• Use "slings" that are as short as possible.
• The load must always be lifted vertically using all four corners with
the load equally distributed to the four lifting points (see figure).
• When lifting and transporting a load suspended in "slings", drive
002564
slowly (below 5 km/h) and pay close attention to the position of

the load.

160 5 Handling – Transporting load
5.5.2 Transporting load

General
WARNING
Transporting loads is associated with major risks.
Risk of roll-over and tipping over! Chance of load
damage to property! Extreme danger!
Respect the lifting capacity of the machine and
exercise the greatest caution during load handling:
• The machine must only be operated on even
surfaces, intended for the machine's total weight
and ground pressure.
• All transporting of loads must take place in
transport position. Exercise caution when
operating, think about the width and height so
that the boom or attachment does not collide with
poles, cables, etc.
• Do not transport the load in a higher position than
necessary since this may cause the machine to roll
or tip over.
• Always operate with the load facing uphill on an
uphill or downhill grade, never operate or turn
across a grade.
• Operate the machine in reverse if the transported
load obscures visibility to the front.
• No personnel may encroach or stand under a
raised load.
• The operator must avoid forceful acceleration
and heavy braking to prevent risk of tipping and
roll-over.
• The operator must always adjust the speed when
turning to prevent skidding and risk of roll-over or
tipping over.
In the event of tipping or roll-over, hold onto the
steering wheel and remain in the cab. Do NOT
attempt to jump out of the cab until any movement
of the machine has finished.
When handling special loads local regulations may
apply. Learn about them and follow them.
Note that illustrations in this section show transport with top lift
attachment and container. Instructions also apply for transport with the
bottom lift attachment and load.

5 Handling – Transporting load 161
Instructions for top lift and bottom lift
NOTE
1 Lift the load slightly.

D E H I
Top lift: when the load is lifted, the middle light, B - Contact,
F G J K (orange), is off. The function for twistlocks is then disengaged.
Bottom lift: when lifting the lamps D, E, F, and G come on for
contact and clamping position. The function of lamps H, I, J and K
A B C is not active with full contact of the leg pair against the load.
2
Disengage the levelling lock and tilt lock, see Tilting, page 168
and Levelling, page 168.
CAUTION
016971
Locking increases the loads on the machine.

Increased mechanical wear.
Disengage the lock function when it is not required
in order to minimise wear on the machine. When the
lock function is active the machine's speed is limited
for extra protection.
3
Move the cab back to the rear/lower position before moving the
machine, see Hydraulic sliding cab, page 171
WARNING
The cab must ALWAYS be in the rear position while
operating the machine.
Risk of product damage.
The cab must be in the rear position in order to be
protected from a dropped load (by the lift cylinders).
4 Back away from the stack.

162 5 Handling – Transporting load
5 Adjust load height and boom to transport position.

D E H I
F G J K
DANGER
A B C
Load handling requires extreme care when loading
and at high load handling height, that is, long boom
extension.
Risk of roll-over! Extreme danger!
When a load is to be lowered, ALWAYS retract the
boom BEFORE the boom is lowered.
016213
6 Correct transport position is with the load as far down and in as

D E H I possible without obstructing visibility, see Transport position, page
162. The load's centre of gravity must be centred laterally.
F G J K
NOTE
A B C When transporting the load with the OHC attachment's folding
extended twistlocks down, the centre of gravity of the load moves
further from the attachment's point of rotation. This affects the
damping of the attachment and increases the strain on the
attachment and boom. Adapt the speed. Avoid transporting a
load with extended twistlocks in lowered position.
NOTE
When transporting loads with bottom lift attachment, machine
speed is limited to max. second gear and 10 km/h.
016214
Transport position
When the machine is to be operated with or without load, assume the
transport position to minimise the risk of roll-over and imbalance while
operating. In transport position, the boom is completely retracted, the
load's centre of gravity is centred sideways (laterally) and the load is
lifted for good forward visibility (see illustration to the left). Do not lift
the load higher than necessary in order to have a clear view.
All transport must take place with the cab in the rear position.
When transporting a load suspended in "slings", drive slowly (below 5

016215
km/h) and pay close attention to the position of the load.

5 Handling – Unloading 163
Operating on grades
Operating on grades
It is important to operate with extreme care on grades since there's an
increased risk of tipping and rolling over.
NOTE
When braking, pay attention that the transmission is disengaged
during braking.
• Operating with a load.

Lower the load as low as possible without compromising visibility.
Retract the boom as far as possible.
Always operate with the load against the grade (see figure),
regardless of travel direction.
• Operating without a load.
Lower and retract the boom as far as possible.
Always operate with the attachment in the direction of the grade
(down), regardless of travel direction.
Working near overhead high voltage power lines

Operate with extreme care in all work near overhead high voltage
power lines, keeping in mind the extensive reach capacity of the boom
and attachment.
016216
DANGER
If the machine comes into contact with overhead high
voltage power lines. Remain seated and call for help!
Extreme danger!
Remain in the cab. Wait for assistance.
5.5.3 Unloading
General
There are two types of attachments which differ in lift handling:
• top lift attachment
• bottom lift attachment
Instructions for top lift attachment
NOTE

164 5 Handling – Unloading
1 Run towards the stack of containers, as close as possible.

A B C
2 Lift the load over the stack.
Strive to centre the load over the stack. The approach angle
toward the container can be varied.
016218 3 Apply the parking brake if desired, or hold the machine stationary
A B C with the service brake. Alternatively, shift to neutral.
4
5 Position the load over the stack. Adjust with rotation, side shift
and boom in/out.
6
Use adjustable tilt or hydraulic levelling in order to move the load
parallel with the unloading location, see Tilting, page 168 and
016219
7 Lower the load.

A B C
When contact is obtained, the middle light, B - Contact, is activated.
8 Open twistlocks. Left light, A - Twistlocks locked, goes out (green)
when release of twistlocks is initiated. Right light, C - Twistlocks
unlocked, illuminates (red) when the twistlocks are completely
open.
Never lift when twistlocks are in the process of being released.
9 Lift the attachment so that it moves clear of the load.
10
Move the cab back to the rear/lower position before moving
016220
the machine, see Hydraulic sliding cab, page 171 or Hydraulic

vertically adjustable cab, page 172
WARNING
11 Back away from the load.

5 Handling – Unloading 165
Instructions for bottom lift attachment
1 Run towards the unloading site, as close as possible.

D E H I
2 Lift the load to suitable height.
F G J K Strive to centre the load over the unloading site.
016221
3 Apply the parking brake if desired, or hold the machine stationary
D E H I with the service brake. Alternatively, shift to neutral.
F G J K 4
5 Position the load over the unloading area. Adjust with rotation,
side shift and boom in/out.
6
Use adjustable tilt or hydraulic levelling in order to move the load
016222
parallel with the unloading location, see Tilting, page 168 and
7 Lower the load.

D E H I
Contact of legs against the load disappears, which is indicated by
F G J K the lights D, E, F and G switching off.
Lights H, I, J and K are activated once again when full contact of
the leg pairs against the load ceases.
Lights H and J are illuminated in order to indicate clamping position.
Light K is illuminated in order to indicate that the front leg pair is
lowered.
017966
8 Leave clamping position for legs to release load.

D E H I
Lights H and J are off to indicate that clamping position is no
F G J K longer active.
Light K is illuminated in order to indicate that the front leg pair is
lowered.
016223

166 5 Handling – Functions for load handling
9 Raise front leg pair.

D E H I
Light K goes off to indicate that the front leg pair is no longer
F G J K lowered.
Light I is activated to indicate that the front leg pair is raised.
10 Move the cab back to the rear/lower position before moving
the machine, see Hydraulic sliding cab, page 171 or Hydraulic
vertically adjustable cab, page 172
WARNING
016224
11 Back away from the load and raise the rear leg pair.
5.5.4 Functions for load handling

Scales
Load weight is approximated with the operating menu for scales.
NOTE
For calibration, contact service personnel.
1 Perform the lifting movement and then lower the load slowly about
10 cm.
0:00pm 2 Select the operating menu for the scales with or and confirm
with . A border around the row for the current weight (position
b) indicates that the function is activated.
3 The different rows have different functions:
-1. 9 t a
Select row with or . Confirm the selection with .
74. 9 t b Undo the selection with .
a. Shows tare weight in tonnes or pounds (lbs).
522 . 9 t c
The value shown in row (a) can be reset to zero (tared) using
016370
the function keys.

Select taring with or .
Switch between taring (current tare weight is displayed) or to
no tare (0 shown). Confirm with .
b. Current weight in tonnes or pounds (lbs), (net weight).
The value in row (b) can be added to row (c).
Select row (b) with or .
Add the value in row (b) to row (c) with .
c. Total weight in tonnes or pounds (lbs) (gross weight).
The value in the row (c) can be reset.
Select row (c) with or .
The value on row (c) can be reset with .
Leave the menu with .

5 Handling – Functions for load handling 167
Automatic spreading 20'–40'
Automatic spreading means that the spreading moves automatically to

the next stop when spreading is activated with the control lever if the
switch for automatic spreading 20'-40'(position 56) is activated. When
automatic spreading is in progress, a buzzer sounds on the attachment
to warn of movement of the machine's parts.
016349
To stop an ongoing automatic spreading, activate spreading in or out of
with the control lever.
The spreading function is dampened for a short time before one of

the stops 20' (30' if the function is activated ) or 40'. To continue
spreading to the end position 40', repeat the instantaneous function
selection with the control lever.
A buzzer on the attachment sounds during automatic spreading. To

stop an ongoing automatic 20' to 40' spreading, activate spreading
in or out of with the control lever.
NOTE
Automatic spreading can only be activated with closed doors and
released parking brake.
Instructions
1 Activate switch for automatic spreading 20'–40' (position 56).
2 Close the doors.
3 Disengage the parking brake.
015593
0 1 4 Check that nothing is in the way of an intended spreading

movement.
5 Activate spreading with the control lever.
6 Closely monitor the attachment's spreading booms and stop the
spreading in the event of a risk of collision.
To stop an ongoing automatic spreading, activate spreading in
or out of with the control lever.
Rotation stop
Rotation stop limits the rotational movement of the attachment ±25°.

When the limit for rotation stop is reached, the rotational movement
stops and the event menu for rotation stop is shown in the display.
Use the switch for by-pass of safety system (position 47) to bypass
the rotation stop.
016347
The event menu for rotation stop disappears from the display when the
rotation of the attachment is within the interval for permitted rotation.
Event menu rotation stop

Tilting
Tilting means that the angle of the attachment can be controlled with
the control lever (position 53), see Control lever (53), page 57, this is
useful for handling loads with uneven centre of gravity.
016203
Tilting is intended for use when lifting and unloading loads, when the
load is transported it should "hang freely" in order to reduce the loads
on the machine.
CAUTION
Instructions
1 Operate the machine forward to the load in the same way as for
normal lifting, see Instructions for top lift attachment, page 157.
2 Tilt the attachment so that the contact surface is parallel with the
load, using the control lever (position 53).
3 Lock the tilt with the switch for tilt lock on the control lever (position
53).
Machine speed is limited to a maximum of 5 km/h when the tilt is
locked.
4 Lift the load in the same way as for normal lifting.
5 Reverse away so that the load hangs freely.
6 Loosen the tilt lock with the switch for tilt lock on the control lever
(position 53).
Levelling
Levelling means that the lateral angle of the attachment can be

controlled with the control lever (position 53), see Control lever (53),
001117
page 57, this is useful for lifting loads that tilt.

Levelling is intended for use when lifting and unloading loads, when
the load is transported it should "hang freely" in order to reduce the
loads on the machine.
CAUTION
Instructions
1 Operate the machine forward to the load in the same way as for
normal lifting, see Instructions for top lift attachment, page 157.

2 Level the attachment so that the contact surface is parallel with the
load, using the control lever (position 53).
3 Lock the levelling with the switch for levelling lock on the control
lever (position 53).
Machine speed is limited to a maximum of 5 km/h when the
levelling is locked.
4 Lift the load in the same way as for normal lifting.
5 Reverse away so that the load hangs freely.
6 Loosen the levelling lock with the switch for levelling lock on the
control lever (position 53).
Overheight legs
Overheight legs allow the lifting of loads under the machine's ground
level.
In order to be able to lower the legs the twistlocks must be unlocked,

see indicator light for unlocked twistlocks position 82.
016972
NOTE
When transporting the load with the OHC attachment's folding
extended twistlocks down, the centre of gravity of the load moves
further from the attachment's point of rotation. This affects the
damping of the attachment and increases the strain on the
attachment and boom. Adapt the speed. Avoid transporting a load
with extended twistlocks in lowered position.
Instructions
1 Operate the boom so that the attachment is sufficiently high up
and far out from the machine in order that the overheight legs can
be operated freely.
2 Check that twistlocks are open, indicator light for unlocked
twistlocks (position 82) is illuminated.
000314
3 Raise/lower the legs with the switch for lowering the overheight
legs (position 59).
015589
1 0 2
4 When the legs are fully lowered the indicator light illuminates
(white). Overheight legs lowered on the attachment's lamp panel.
016937
5 Operate the machine for load handling in the same way as for
normal lifting, see Instructions for top lift attachment, page 157 and
Instructions for top lift attachment, page 163

Support jacks
A
Both support jacks (position B) are mounted at the front of the frame
and their function is to increase the capacity of the machine during load
handling. The support jacks are operated with the switch for support
jacks (position A), see Switch, support jacks (50), page 47.
When the support jacks are fully lowered, the indicator light for lowered
support jacks illuminates, see Indicator light, lowered support jacks
(79), page 37. When the support jacks are moving, the event menu for
support jacks is shown, see Event menu support jacks, description,
page 78.
016225
B
The following conditions must be met in order to lower the support
A. Switch, support jacks (position 49) jacks:
B. Support jacks • Parking brake released.

• Transmission in neutral position.
• Machine stationary.
• Doors closed.
• Operator in seat.
Instructions
1 Drive forward toward the load handling site and stop the machine.
2 Change to neutral position without activating the parking brake.
3 Operate support jacks down with the switch for the support jacks.
Lowering/raising can be either manual (the switch must be held
depressed throughout the lowering/raising) or automatic (a short
press activates lowering/raising to end position down or up). The
setting can only be changed during a service.
The event menu for support jacks is shown in the display during
movement. On machines set for automatic lowering/raising of the
support jacks, "AUTO" is shown together with the symbol on the
016333
display when the support jacks are lowered/raised down or up.

When the support jacks are lowered, this is indicated by the
Event menu support jacks indicator light for lowered support jacks (position 79). The event
menu in the display disappears.
4 Carry out load handling.
5 Operate support jacks up with the switch for the support jacks.
Lowering/raising can be either manual (the switch must be held
depressed throughout the lowering/raising) or automatic (a short
press activates lowering/raising to end position down or up). The
setting can only be changed during a service.
On machines set for automatic lowering/raising of the support
jacks, "AUTO" is shown together with the symbol on the display
when the support jacks are lowered/raised down or up.
When the support jacks leave the lower position, the indicator light
for support jacks is switched off (position 79). When the support
jacks are fully raised, the event menu for support jacks is switched
off in the display.

Hydraulic sliding cab
A
Hydraulic longitudinal sliding of the cab facilitates visibility during load
handling. The cab is operated using the hydraulic sliding cab switch
(position 60).
For the cab to be moved, the operator's door(s) must be closed. In

addition, the control breaker for hydraulics must not be activated.
If the cab should jam, then it can be moved manually by disengaging

the engine, see Emergency equipment, page 93.
A. Switch for cab movement (position 60) 016226
When the cab is moved from the rear position, the limit for permissible
load centre is adjusted variably to the cab's current position. This
prevents the load from being lifted over the cab. When the load
reaches the safety zone in relation to the cab's position, synchronised
lift is activated automatically (lowering the boom or increasing boom
extension) so that the load is lifted straight up or down.
Speed limitation is available as an option when the cab is moved

from the rearmost position.
WARNING
017927

LC-limitation for hydraulic longitudinal sliding of the protected from a dropped load (by the lift cylinders).
cab
Instructions
1 Run toward the load handling site and stop the machine.
2 Move the cab with the switch.
Hold in the switch during the entire movement.
NOTE
Move the cab while the machine is stationary!
3 Perform lifting.
4 Operate the cab back to the rear position with the switch before
the load is moved.

Hydraulic vertically adjustable cab
A
The vertically adjustable cab simplifies visibility during load handling.
The cab is operated using the hydraulic vertical cab adjustment switch
(position 60).
For the cab to be moved, the doors must be closed. In addition, the
control breaker for hydraulics must not be activated. The left-hand door
is locked by a mechanical lock when the cab leaves its lowest position.
The right-hand door has a short wire that blocks the door lock so that
the door cannot be opened, regardless of cab position.
016227
If the cab should jam in the raised position, it can be lowered manually
with an emergency lowering valve, see Emergency equipment, page
Hydraulic vertically adjustable cab
93.
A. Switch for cab movement (position 60)
On machines with hydraulic vertically adjustable cab, LC-limitation is
standard and prevents the load from being lifted over the cab. When
the load reaches the safety zone in relation to the cab's position,
synchronised lift is activated automatically (lowering the boom or
increasing boom extension) so that the load is lifted straight up or down.
When the cab is moved from the lowest position, machine speed is
limited to 10 km/h.
Instructions
1 Close the doors and secure safety chains on the insides of the
doors.
A Use the seatbelt.
2 Run toward the load handling site and stop the machine.
3 Move the cab with the switch.
Hold in the switch during the entire movement.
A mechanical lock (position A) prevents the operator from opening
the left-hand door by mistake. The lock releases the driver's door
when the cab is lowered to its lowest position.
NOTE
Move the cab while the machine is stationary!
4 Carry out load handling.

014270
A. Mechanical lock

On the cab frame there are two lock lugs that must be used to secure
the cab in the raised position, for service work for example.
DANGER
When entering under raised cab.
Extreme danger!
A Secure the cab with the lock lugs (position A) on the
sides of the cab frame.
001977
A. Lock lug
Height limitation
Height limitation restricts how high the boom can be operated. Height
limitation is adjustable according to the customer needs.
When the boom reaches a preset height (position A), the lifting
A movement is stopped and the event menu for height limitation shows
the machine's total height. Lower or retract the boom to continue load
handling.
When it is necessary to lift above the height limitation the function can
be by-passed with the switch for by-pass of safety system (position 47).
When the height limitation has been passed (the grey field in the figure,
covering about 70 cm) lifting, lowering or extension can be operated
without bypassing.
016230

LC-limitation
LC-limitation prevents the load from being lifted too close to the
machine. When the load reaches the set distance from the machine,
synchronised lift is activated automatically (lowering the boom or
increasing boom extension) so that the load is lifted straight up or down.
Use the switch for by-pass of safety system (position 47) to bypass
the LC-limitation.
WARNING
The load may strike the cab when the LC-limitation has
been by-passed.
Danger! LC-limitation disengaged!
Avoid by-passing the LC-limitation.
016228
Load counter
The number of lifts is recorded in the operating menu for load counter.
The different counters can be reset separately.
Instructions
10:23 1 Select the operating menu for load counter with or and
confirm with . A frame around the row shows the selected
counter.
1 23 1 234 7 6 pcs a Undo selection with .
1 23 2 234 7 6 pcs b 2 Select counter with or . A frame around the row shows the
selected counter.
1 23
1 234 7 6 pcs c Undo selection with .
1 23
2 234 7 6 pcs d a. Top lift or tool changer, counter 1.
016384
b. Top lift or tool changer, counter 2.

c. Bottom lift, OHC lift or lifting tool, counter 1.
d. Bottom lift, OHC lift or lifting tool, counter 2.
3 Reset the counter with .

5 Handling – Customer settings via display 175
5.6 Customer settings via display

5.6.1 Menu for date and time
Description
Setting the time
10:23
1 Select menu for customer settings with or and confirm with
.
0 016375
10:23 2 Select SET TIME/DATE with or and confirm with .

CUSTOMER SETTI NGS
a. Setting the date and time
b. Setting units
0
SET TI ME/ DATE a c. Setting of Eco Drive Mode
SET SI / US UNI TS b d. Setting of automatic start and stop function
0
SET ECO DRI VE MODE c
SET AUTO START AND STOP d
017815
10:23 3 Select SET TIME with or and confirm with .

CUSTOMER SETTI NGS
0
SET TI ME 1 0: 2 3
SET DATE 2 01 1 - 0 9 - 16
0
SET TI ME STYLE
014935
10:23 4 Adjust the hours with and , confirm with . Continue in this
SET TI ME way with the minutes and seconds. Leave the menu with .
07:15 : 4 5
0
014941

176 5 Handling – Menu for date and time
Setting the date
10:23
.
016375
0

CUSTOMER SETTI NGS
b. Setting units
0
0
017815
10:23 3 Select SET DATE with or and confirm with .

CUSTOMER SETTI NGS
0
SET TI ME 1 0: 2 3
SET DATE 2 01 1 - 0 9 - 16
0
SET TI ME STYLE
015322
10:23 4 Adjust the year with and , confirm with . Continue in this
SET DATE way with the month and day. Leave the menu with .
2011- 09 - 19
0
014942
Setting the time format
10:23
.
0
016375

5 Handling – Menu for date and time 177

CUSTOMER SETTI NGS
b. Setting units
0
0
017815
0
10:23 3 Select SET TIME STYLE with or and confirm with .

CUSTOMER SETTI NGS
0
SET TI ME 1 0: 2 3
SET DATE 2 01 1 - 0 9 - 16
0
SET TI ME STYLE
015323
10:23 4 Select the time format 24h or 12h am/pm with or . Leave
SET TI ME STYLE the menu with .
0
24 h
12 h a m/ pm
0
014943
Setting the unit
10:23
.
0
016375
10:23 2 Select SET SI/US UNITS with or and confirm with .

CUSTOMER SETTI NGS
b. Setting units
0
0
017815

178 5 Handling – Menu for date and time
10:23 3 Select SI UNITS or US UNITS with or . Leave the menu

CUSTOMER SETTI NGS with .
0
SI UNI TS
US UNI TS
0
014936
0
Setting of Eco Drive Mode
The menu is only available if the machine is set for Eco Drive Mode
to be selectable by the operator.
10:23
.
0
016375
10:23 2 Select SET ECO DRIVE MODE with or and confirm with .
CUSTOMER SETTI NGS
b. Setting units
0
0
017815
10:23 3 Select ECO, NORMAL or PERFORMANCE with or . Leave

CUSTOMER SETTI NGS the menu with .
For a more detailed description, see Eco Drive Mode, page 141.
0
POWER
NORMAL
0
ECO
017376
Setting of automatic start and stop function

5 Handling – Menu for date and time 179
10:23
.
016375
0
10:23 2 Select SET AUTO START AND STOP with or and confirm
CUSTOMER SETTI NGS with .
0
SET TI ME/ DATE a b. Setting units
SET SI / US UNI TS b c. Setting of Eco Drive Mode
0 d. Setting of automatic start and stop function
017815
10:23 3 Select off or on with or . Leave the menu with .

SET AUTO START & STOP
For a more detailed description, see Automatic start and stop
function, page 140.
0
Ena bl e
0
017499
Setting of display language
10:23
.
0
016375
10:23 2 Select SET LANGUAGE with or and confirm with .

CUSTOMER SETTI NGS
b. Setting units
0
SET SI / US UNI TS a c. Setting of Eco Drive Mode
SET ECO DRI VE MODE b d. Setting of automatic start and stop function
0
SET AUTO START AND STOP c
SET LANGUAGE d
017950

180 5 Handling – Menu for active error codes
10:23 3 Select off or on with or . Leave the menu with .

SET LANGUAGE
0
ENGLI SH
CHI NESE
0
017500
0
5.6.2 Menu for active error codes

Description
10:23
1 Select the menu for ACTIVE ERRORS with or and confirm
with .
0
016376
a b c 2 The menu shows the active error codes.

Scroll through the error codes with or . Leave the menu
10:23 with .
ACTI VE ERRORS 1/ 10 d
a. Device that generated the error code.
k 0 111/ 5480- 5 e b. Component error code concerns (SPN code).

c. Type of error (FMI code).
d. Number of active error codes. The first digit shows the error
j 0
being displayed, the second digit the number of active error
codes.
i 0 e. Information can be found in the operator's manual.
f. Symbol for the device that generated the error code.
014944
h g f g. Symbol for operator action.

h. Symbol for the error code level.
i. Number of error codes with the level INFORMATION.
j. Number of error codes with the level WARNING.
k. Number of error codes with the level STOP.
For more information, see Error codes, general, page 97.

5 Handling – Menu for inactive error codes 181
5.6.3 Menu for inactive error codes

Description
10:23
1 Select the menu for INACTIVE ERRORS with or and confirm
with .
016377
0
10:23
2 The menu shows the inactive error codes.
ERROR HI STORY 1/ 12 Scroll through the error codes with or . Leave the menu
with .
1 111 / 5 170 - / 3
0
20 11 - 09 - 19 1 0: 2 3 For more information, see Error codes, general, page 97.
2 111 / 5 160 - / 3
0 20 11 - 09 - 19 1 0: 2 3
3 0/ 0- / 0
00 00 - 00 - 00 0 0: 0 0
014945
5.6.4 Menu for statistics and history

Description
10:23 1 Select the menu for running times with or and confirm with .
0
016353
2 The menu shows the cumulative operating time for the machine's
10:23 1/ XX
components. This counter cannot be reset.
OPERATI NG HOURS
a. Operating time engine in hours.
121 2332 h
a b. Operating hours for transmission, with gear activated, in hours.
798 4 h c. Operating hours for hydraulic functions activated, in hours.
b
d. Proportion of engine operating hours at idling speed, in
374 3 h c percent.
48 % d Select the next statistics and history menu with or go back with
016354
. Leave the menu with .

182 5 Handling – Menu for statistics and history
3 The menu shows resettable operating time, since the last reset
10:23 2/ XX
for the machine's components.
OPERATI NG HOURS
a. Operating time engine in hours.
123 3 2 h b. Operating hours for transmission, with gear activated, in hours.
a
c. Operating hours for hydraulic functions activated, in hours.
798 4 h b
d. Proportion of engine operating hours at idling speed, in
374 3 h c percent.
48 % d Select the row to be reset to zero with a short press on . Select
row with or . Reset the row with .
016355
Reset all rows by pressing for more than 2 seconds.
Select the next statistics and history menu with or go back with
4 The menu shows driving distances.
10:23 3/XX
DISTANCE a. Cumulative driving distance in km or miles. This counter
cannot be reset.
123 3 2 km a b. Driving distance odometer 1 since last reset to zero in km or
miles.
798 4.1 km b c. Driving distance odometer 2 since last reset to zero in km or
374 3.5 miles.
km c
Select the row to be reset to zero with a short press on . Select
016356

5 The menu shows accumulated fuel statistics. This counter cannot
10:23 4/ XX
be reset.
FUEL
a. Total fuel consumption in litres or gallons.
163 4 5 l a b. Average fuel consumption in litres/hour or gallons/hour.
c. Average fuel consumption in litres/100 km or gallons/100
25. 1 l/h b miles.
15. 4 1/100km c d. Average fuel consumption in litres/lift or gallons/lift.
3.2 3 l/pcs d Select the next statistics and history menu with or go back with
016357
6 The menu shows resettable fuel statistics since the last reset.
10:23 5/ XX
FUEL a. Fuel usage in litres or gallons.
b. Average fuel consumption in litres/hour or gallons/hour.
134 2 l a c. Average fuel consumption in litres/100 km or gallons/100
miles.
25. 1 l/h b
d. Average fuel consumption in litres/lift or gallons/lift.
15. 8 1/100km c
4.1 4 l/pcs d row with or . Reset the row with .
016358

7 The menu shows accumulated load statistics. This counter cannot
10:23 6/ XX
be reset.
LOAD
a. Total number of lifts.
1 23 234 7 6 pcs a b. Average lift rate in number of lifts/hour.
1 23 7.3 pcs/h b Select the next statistics and history menu with or go back with
016359

5 Handling – Menu for statistics and history 183
8 The menu shows resettable load statistics.

10:23 7/ XX
LOAD a. Number of lifts counter 1.
b. Number of lifts counter 2.
1 23
1 243 2 pcs a c. Average lift rate in number of lifts/hour.
1 23
2 33 pcs b Select the row to be reset to zero with a short press on . Select
1 23 5.2 pcs/h c row with or . Reset the row with .
016360
10:23 8/ XX
9 The menu shows accumulated load counter.
LOAD a. Total number of lifts in 20'-position (including OHC ).
b. Total number of lifts in 30'-position (including OHC ).
1 23 2 0´ 243 2 pcs a
c. Total number of lifts in 40'-position (including OHC ).
1 23 3 0´ 33 pcs b d. Total number of bottom lifts or OHC lifts .
1 23 4 0´ 33 pcs c Select the next statistics and history menu with or go back with
33 . Leave the menu with .
1 23 pcs d
016382
10:23 9/ XX 10 The menu shows resettable load counter.

LOAD a. Number of lifts in 20'-position (including OHC ).
b. Number of lifts in 30'-position (including OHC ).
1 23 2 0´ 243 2 pcs a
c. Number of lifts in 40'-position (including OHC ).
1 23 3 0´ 33 pcs b d. Number of bottom lifts or OHC lifts .
1 23 4 0´ 33 pcs c Select the row to be reset to zero with a short press on . Select
33 row with or . Reset the row with .
1 23 pcs d
016383
11 The menu shows resettable load statistics.
10:23 10/ XX
LOAD a. Cumulative lifting load of 1000s of tonnes. This counter
cannot be reset.
234 76 1000t a b. Total lifting load since last reset to zero in tonnes.
234 76 t b c. Average load per lift since last reset to zero in tonnes/lift or
pounds/lift.
24. 3 t/pcs c Select the row to be reset to zero with a short press on . Select
017819

10:23 11/XX
12 The menu shows resettable load and fuel statistics.
LOAD a. Average lifting load since last reset to zero in tonnes/hour or
pounds/hour.
15. 4 t/h a b. Average fuel consumption since last reset to zero in litres/hour
or gallons/hour.
25. 1 l/h b
c. Average fuel consumption since last reset to zero in litres/100
5.1 l/100t c tonnes or gallons/100 tonnes.
017820


184 5 Handling – Menu for services and settings
10:23 12/XX 13
Au t o St a r t & St o p The menu shows the cumulative statistics for the automatic start
and stop function.
25. 1 l/h a a. Average fuel consumption in litres/hour or gallons/hour,
121 2332 including the time that the engine has been auto-stopped.
h b
b. The time that the engine has been switched off by the
234 7 6 pcs c automatic start and stop function in hours, including the time
that the engine has been auto-stopped.
c. Number of automatic engine stops.
017821
10:23 13/XX 14
Au t o St a r t & St op The menu shows the resettable statistics for the automatic start
and stop function.
25. 1 l/h a a. Average fuel consumption in litres/hour or gallons/hour,
121 2332 including the time that the engine has been auto-stopped.
min b
b. The time that the engine has been switched off by the
234 7 6 pcs c automatic start and stop function in minutes, including the time
that the engine has been auto-stopped.
c. Number of automatic engine stops.
017822

5.6.5 Menu for services and settings

Description
10:23
Used for diagnostics and settings on the machine by authorised
CUSTOMER SETTI NGS personnel. Access code required.
0
014981

5 Handling – Menu for machine check 185
5.6.6 Menu for machine check

Menu for machine check, description
10:23 1 Select the menu for MACHINE CHECK with or and confirm
with .
016361
10:23
2 The menu shows lamp checking. This function switches on all the
MACHI NE CHECK lights on the machine in order to facilitate daily inspection.
Switch on all the lights on the machine with . The tick in the box
indicates that the lights are switched on.
NOTE
Run the engine at idle in order to prevent discharge of the
batteries.
016362
Select the next menu with or go back with . Leave the menu
with .
10:23 3
MACHI NE CHECK The menu shows central lubrication. This menu activates the
central lubrication for extra lubrication or function check of the
central lubrication.
Activate the central lubrication's main units with . The tick in the
box indicates that a lubrication cycle is activated.
with .
016365
1 0: 23
4 The menu shows checking the scale. This menu reads the values
MACHI NE CHECK from the load detector's sensors and shows them individually. The
load is weighed regardless of boom position.
a. Shows load's weight in kilo. Accuracy is 1% of load capacity,
3 53 80 kg a i.e. approx. +/-500 kg.
2. 30 m b b. Shows distance from centre of front wheel to load centre in
metres.
4. 07 m c
c. Shows extension of boom in metres.
30 . 6 ° d
d. Shows boom angle in degrees.
016366
with .

186 6 Inspection and maintenance
6 Inspection and
maintenance
General
This chapter describes:
• DAILY INSPECTION - performed by the operator.
Daily inspection describes the running inspection that significantly
contributes to making the machine a safe and reliable workplace.
• MAINTENANCE - performed by the operator.
Maintenance describes some simple maintenance actions.
• SERVICE - performed by trained service technician.
Service is performed according to a service schedule and by
service technicians. Service is described in the maintenance
manual.
It is the operator who is responsible for ensuring that the machine
comes in for service according to prescribed service intervals.
Procedures are described in the maintenance manual.
• ERROR CODE INFORMATION - read off by the operator.
Error code information is read off by the operator from the control
system's display in the cab. Depending on the type of error code, it
is handled by the operator or a service technician.
NOTE
All time information refers to operating time, that is, the time shown
by the hour meter on the panel.
CAUTION
Only spare parts approved by Cargotec may be used.
This is to maintain the machine's safety as well as to
meet warranty and service agreements!
Only use spare parts and fluids approved by Cargotec
in order to fulfil warranty terms.

6 Inspection and maintenance – Daily inspection 187
6.1 Daily inspection

General
Daily inspection of the machine is extremely important in order to
ensure that it is safe both for the operator and its surroundings.
Every operator should perform checks before a new work shift. In this
way, operators can avoid running defective machines with malfunctions
that have been generated or caused during an earlier work shift.
WARNING
inspection.
Instructions
Perform the following checks:
1. Visual inspection of the machine's exterior and engine
compartment. Pay attention to odours from fuel or electronic
equipment. Walk around the machine and check the following:
• That sensors for twistlocks and contact are clean and free of
grease, and that the contact pins for twistlocks can be moved
up and down easily. Note that a contact pin that binds in the
upper position may indicate contact, despite the frame not
being positioned against the container.
• The machine is equipped with bottom-lift attachment , check
that the sensors for lift leg position, contact and load lift are
clean and grease-free.
• The machine is equipped with overheight legs ; check that
the sensors for the position of the overheight legs are clean
and grease-free.
• Leakage from engine, fuel and AdBlue systems, transmission,
drive axle, steering cylinder, hydraulic hoses and hydraulic
cylinders.
DANGER
Residue from fuel, oils, grease or other flammable
materials on the engine or in the engine compartment
is a fire hazard.
Fire hazard!
Remove residue of flammable materials in the engine
compartment as soon as they are detected. Be extra
careful on hot surfaces such as exhaust systems,
manifolds or turbochargers. If leakage of oil, fuel or
coolant is detected, the reason should be investigated
and the fault corrected before starting the engine.
• Undo the wheel nuts

Following a wheel replacement, check-tightening of the bolted
joints is very important (after approx. 4-5 operating hours)
• Damage to rims

188 6 Inspection and maintenance – Daily inspection
• Uneven tyre wear - remove any objects that may penetrate the
tyres, e.g. glass, metal filings, etc.
• Tyre pressure
• Cab with regards to damage and dirty windows, rear view
mirrors.
2. In cold weather:
• Check that wiper blades have not frozen to the windscreen.
WARNING
Attempting to manually move the wiper arms will
damage the wiper motor's gear or shaft.
Damage to the wiper motor's gear or shafts.
Never try to manually move the wiper arms.
• Remove snow and ice from air inlets and radiator grill.
• Antifreeze in washer fluid.
• Disconnect the auxiliary heater .
Electrical box for auxiliary heater is located by the cab steps
on the left side of the machine.
• Check the Cummins engine's crankcase ventilation pipe for
ice, damage and dirt. Clean and replace if necessary.
3. Check fluid levels for the following fluids in accordance with the
description, see 6.2 Maintenance, page 191. Top up, if necessary,
with the correct fluid:
CAUTION
If an abnormal amount of fluid has been used, notify
the foreman or supervisor
• Hydraulic oil.
• Oil for brake system.
• Washer fluid - windows.
• Engine oil, see Engine oil, general, page 203
• Transmission oil.
4. Check the engine
• Check the engine's air filter indicator, also check and drain the
fuel prefilter if required (Volvo engine) and fuel filter (Cummins
engine). For a description, see Air filter engine, general, page
201 and Fuel system, general, page 195.
• Check the following for the Cummins engine:
- fuel filter with water separator, should be drained of water
daily, see Fuel system, general, page 195.
- air filter dust reservoir, dust should be removed daily, see Air
filter engine, general, page 201.
- pipe assemblies for wear, see Air filter engine, general, page
201.
- cooling fan for cracks, loose rivets and bent or loose blades.
Tighten the screws if necessary.

6 Inspection and maintenance – Daily inspection 189
5. Start the machine according to instructions and check:

• Instruments - warning lamps, indicators, any error codes.
• Fuel level - the gauge must not show empty tank.
• AdBlue– level - the gauge must not show empty tank.
• Lighting, direction indicators, signal, brake lights, warning lights
and reflectors, check function and any other considerations.
All the lights on the machine can be switched on simultaneously
with the menu for machine check, see Menu for machine
check, description, page 185.
• Windscreen wipers.
• Check that the rear view mirrors are intact, clean and properly
adjusted.
6. Operate the machine slowly/carefully and check the following
functions:
• Brakes - check-brake at least three times.
• Steering - in both directions.
• Transmission - all gears - forward and reverse.
7. Run all functions with hydraulic cylinders (boom lift/lower/in/out
and side shift) to their end-positions for lubrication of the cylinder
barrels and piston rods.
8. Check the attachment's functions and that:
• The indicator lights for load handling are working.
• Check that the twistlocks are working. This is done by lifting
an empty container until the light "Contact" goes out. It should
not now be possible to release the twistlocks.
WARNING
Do not use the machine if the system for locking
containers does not work.
damage!
Use of the machine must be discontinued, and it has to
A be taken to a service workshop for needed actions.
016984
A. Contact pin • The machine is equipped with bottom lift attachment ; check
that lowering of the lift legs is working and that bottom lift of
the load is working.
• The machine is equipped with overheight legs ; check
that lowering of the overheight legs is working and that the
indicator light illuminates when the legs are lowered. Check
that twistlocks are working with lowered overheight legs in
accordance with the point above.

190 6 Inspection and maintenance – Daily inspection
9. For central lubrication :

Make sure grease has not seeped out from the safety valve
(position A). This is a sign that the central lubrication is not working
properly.
10. Check the machine's operating hours - notify the
foreman/supervisor if the machine is close to a service interval.
11. Check if any error codes are active.
See 5.3 Error codes, page 97.
12. Make sure that AdBlue is drained from the hoses when the
machine is turned off. The AdBlue– pump can still be heard for
short time after the engine has been switched off.
The system voltage must not be cut with the battery disconnector
before the pump has stopped.
Only applies to certain engine alternatives.
A Safety valve
B Filler nipple

6 Inspection and maintenance – Maintenance 191
6.2 Maintenance
General
The following maintenance actions are described in this chapter:
– Cleanliness, general, page 193
– Fuel system, general, page 195
– Windscreen washer, general, page 200
– Wiper blades, general, page 200
– Air filter engine, general, page 201
– Cooling system, general, page 202
– Engine oil, general, page 203
– Transmission oil, general, page 204
– Oil, brake system, general, page 205
– Hydraulic system, general, page 206
– Tyres and rims, general, page 208
– Accumulators, general, page 211
– Central lubrication, general, page 212
– Battery and battery disconnector, general, page 213
– Fuses for electrical system, general, page 215
– Lighting, general, page 220
Safety during maintenance

Observe the following when maintenance work is to be performed:
• Always switch off the engine during service work. The only
exception is when service work requires engine power.
• Use stop blocks at the wheels.
• No work may be carried out on the machine without the right
knowledge and skills to do the work correctly. Maintenance
performed incorrectly may be dangerous.
• Always use a hard hat, protective glasses, gloves, work shoes and
other protective items as required by the work situation.
• Read all plates and instructions on the machine and in the
operator's manual before performing any maintenance. Each one
contains important information about handling and maintenance.
• Avoid spills when draining/filling oils, fuel and AdBlue. Use
reservoirs/tanks, pump, hose, etc. for safe handling. Oils, fuel
and AdBlue cause environmental damage. They should be taken
care of by an authorised company. AdBlue is also corrosive and
can damage electrical wiring, etc. and must be rinsed away
immediately if spilt.
• Always drain the pressure from the accumulators before working
on the hydraulic system.

192 6 Inspection and maintenance – Maintenance
Cab movement
The cab can be slid forward for better visibility and access in the engine
compartment. Including:
• manual cab movement
• hydraulic longitudinal movement of the cab
• hydraulic vertically adjustable cab
For hydraulic cab movement, the movement is controlled with a

hydraulic function on the panel for hydraulic functions. See chapter 4
Instruments and controls and chapter 5 Handling.
Instructions for manual cab movement
1 Select neutral gear with gear and multi-function lever.
2 Apply the parking brake.
A 3 Close the doors.
4 Remove the pin (position B) from the lock handle.
5 Open the lock handle (position C).
Loosen the lock handle on both sides.
6 Push cab forward.
DANGER
The cab is very heavy and the machine must not be
moved without first securing the cab. It is important
that the locking catches are intact.
Extreme danger! Risk of crushing!
016232
Secure the cab on both sides, with the lock handles

B C and pins before starting to operate the machine.
A. Position lock handle Replace damaged locking catches.
B. Lock pin
C. Lock handle for securing cab

6 Inspection and maintenance – Cleanliness 193
6.2.1 Cleanliness
Cleanliness, general
Dirt has a negative impact on performance. Experience shows that
clean machines have fewer malfunctions.
The machine should be washed regularly for optimal functionality.

Keep the following in mind when washing:
• Run the hydraulic cylinders to the inner positions.
• Use mild cleaning agents.
Use a degreaser if necessary. Scrub if necessary.
• Use a high-pressure washer, wide water jet.
CAUTION
High-pressure washing of sensitive
components may lead to short-circuiting and
cause malfunction.
Product damage!
Do not use a high-pressure washer on the
cab, radiator, battery compartment, electric
components, control units, connectors, cable
joints, cylinder seals, stub axles, axle seals and
chains.
NOTE
After washing with de-greaser, the hydraulic cylinders should be run
in and out a few times to obtain satisfactory lubrication once again.
WARNING
hydrocarbons.
Low strength! Danger!
Check the surface layer of the roof window and
clean only with washer fluid or mild detergent. Rinse
thoroughly with lukewarm water afterwards. Replace a
damaged roof window that shows cracks or scratches
immediately!

194 6 Inspection and maintenance – Cleanliness
CAUTION
Cleaning agents contain different solvents.
Health-hazardous and highly flammable.
Ensure good ventilation when cleaning the machine.
Avoid skin contact, use protective gloves. If you
get dizzy when using cleaning agents, get fresh air
immediately and contact a doctor. If the cleaning agent
has found its way into your eyes, rinse immediately
with lots of water and contact a doctor immediately.
CAUTION
Cracks or scratches result in reduced strength of the
roof window.
Low strength!
Replace a damaged roof window immediately.
CAUTION
Objects may shoot off when using compressed air for
cleaning.
Risk of injury.
Use protective goggles and protective gloves. Exercise
caution to avoid injury to yourself or those nearby.
For optimum functionality the machine should also be kept clean inside
the cab.
• Plastic material: Vacuum clean, brush/wipe with lightly moistened
rag. Use mild cleaning agent and always wipe down with a lightly
moistened rag and clean water.
• Textile material: Vacuum clean, brush/clean with e.g. furniture or
carpet cleaning agent in accordance with the instructions on the
packaging.

6 Inspection and maintenance – Fuel system 195
6.2.2 Fuel system

Fuel system, general
Fuel filling is located on the left-hand side of the machine.
NOTE
In order to prevent fuel and AdBlue being filled in the wrong tank,
the filler cap for fuel is black and for AdBlue it is blue.
NOTE
Make sure that the area around the tank cap is clean when
refuelling.
WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable and health hazardous.
Fire hazard! Health hazard!
Handle with great care and avoid all possible ignition
016243
A B sources, for example, cigarettes, sparks. Avoid skin

contact, use protective gloves. In the event of skin
A. Fuel filler orifice contact and spills on clothes, wash the skin and
change clothes.
B. Only machines with Volvo TAD1360VE
Filling AdBlue
CAUTION
The quality of the diesel affects the service life of the
engine.
Make sure that correct diesel quality is used.
Incorrect diesel quality will lead to after-treatment
system failure resulting in high repair costs.

196 6 Inspection and maintenance – Fuel system
IMPORTANT
If AdBlue is accidentally poured into the fuel tank this
can lead to the following:
• The engine will not run at full power or not at all.
• Injectors can be damaged.
• Corrosion may arise in the exhaust system between
the turbo and the after-treatment system.
• Expensive repairs.
If fuel is accidentally poured into the AdBlue tank this
can lead to the following:
• The after-treatment system can be seriously
damaged.
• The engine no longer satisfies emission
requirements.
• Expensive repairs.
Fuel
• Always fill up with diesel fuel. For tank volume and fuel quality,
see 9 Specifications, page 243.
• Never use additives in the diesel fuel.
• In wintertime, try to fill up immediately after finished operation.
This prevents condensation in the fuel tank. Do not use
anti-condensation agents, for example, alcohol, in the fuel.
• Do not refuel when the engine is running.
• Make sure that the fuel nozzle is connected securely in the filler
pipe (to prevent spills and generation of static electricity).
• Clean around the filler pipe after refuelling and handle used rags,
wiped up fuel, etc. in an environmentally sound manner.
CAUTION
AdBlue can irritate with skin and eye contact and if
inhaled.
Health hazard!
Handle carefully and avoid skin contact, wear
protective gloves. In the event of any contact with
the skin and spillage on clothing, wash the skin with
large quantities of water and change contaminated
clothing and gloves. In the event of eye contact, rinse
thoroughly with water for several minutes and seek
medical advice if necessary. If inhaled, breathe fresh
air and seek medical advice if necessary.

CAUTION
AdBlue spilt on hot components evaporates quickly.
Irritating to the eyes and respiratory system.
Turn your face away. Vaporised AdBlue can act
corrosive to eyes and mucous membranes in the
throat. In the event of eye contact, rinse thoroughly
with water for several minutes and seek medical advice
if necessary. If inhaled, breathe fresh air and seek
medical advice if necessary.
IMPORTANT
Avoid spilling AdBlue on the ground and in
watercourses.
Spillage on the ground must be absorbed with sand or
other absorbent, non-combustible materials.
IMPORTANT
Never fill another AdBlue other than that specified in 9
Specifications.
Risk of damage to the after-treatment system!
Never start the engine if anything other than pure
AdBlue has been filled in the AdBlue tank.
IMPORTANT
Avoid spilling AdBlue on the machine.
AdBlue is highly corrosive and harmful primarily to
wiring and electrical components.
Clean AdBlue from electrical wiring and components
immediately. If a connector has been exposed to
AdBlue solution then it must be replaced immediately
so that the AdBlue solution does not creep further into
the wiring. AdBlue creeps at a speed of 0.6 m/h in the
wiring. Cleaning with water and compressed air is not
sufficient due to AdBlue oxidising the metal itself.
AdBlue
• Always fill with pure AdBlue. For tank volume and AdBlue quality,
• Never use additives in the AdBlue.
• In wintertime, try to fill up immediately after finished operation. This
prevents condensation in the AdBlue tank.

198 6 Inspection and maintenance – Fuel system
• Do not refuel when the engine is running.

Switch off the engine and wait 2 minutes before refilling AdBlue.
When the engine is switched off AdBlue is pumped back into the
tank. If the engine is not switched off before refilling then there
is a risk of overfilling and leakage, with damage to the machine
and the environment as a result when the engine is switched off
the next time.
• Make sure the nozzle for AdBlue is correctly fitted to the filler pipe
(avoid spillage).
• Clean around the filler pipe after refuelling and handle used rags,
wiped up fuel, etc. in an environmentally sound manner.

Fuel prefilter (Volvo engine) and fuel filter (Cummins

engine), instructions
NOTE
The water separator should be drained of water when necessary
or at least every 50 operating hours.
Cummins engine QSB6.7 Stage 4/Tier 4f must be drained daily
DANGER
The fuel is highly flammable.
Fire hazard! Extreme danger!
Make sure that open flames, sparks, or red-hot/glowing
objects have been extinguished before starting work
on or near the fuel system. Do not smoke near the
machine during work on the fuel system.
1 Turn off the engine and the main system voltage with the battery
disconnector.
2 Position a receptacle under the filter.
016294
Fuel filter Volvo TAD1360VE
3 Drain the water from the filter.

Use your hand to open the drain valve. Turn the valve
anticlockwise until the valve drops down and draining starts, drain
until clear fuel is visible. When closing the valve, turn clockwise
and only tighten the cock by hand.
CAUTION
When closing, do not turn too hard. Overtightening
may damage the threads.
WARNING
016380
Fuel on hands.
Rash and irritation.
Fuel filter Cummins QSM11
Avoid skin contact with the fuel, use gloves.
4 Remove the collection container. Handle the fuel as

environmentally hazardous and fire hazardous waste.

200 6 Inspection and maintenance – Windscreen washer
6.2.3 Windscreen washer

Windscreen washer, general
CAUTION
hydrocarbons.
The strength of the roof window may be affected!
Only use clean water with an antifreeze agent, e.g.
antifreeze fluid.
The washer fluid reservoir (position A) is located to the left of the cab's
front edge.
Low washer fluid level is indicated with the event menu, see Event
016234
menu low washer fluid level, description, page 83.
A. Washer fluid reservoir
Instructions
1 Check the level in the reservoir. Top up with washer fluid as
required. For volume, see 9 Specifications, page 243.
2 Add anti-freeze. Select a suitable concentration (dilution
water/anti-freeze fluid) according to the prevailing outdoor
temperatures.
6.2.4 Wiper blades

Wiper blades, general
Instructions
A B
WARNING
Attempting to manually move the wiper arms will
damage the wiper motor's gear or shaft.
Damage to the wiper motor's gear or shafts.
Never try to manually move the wiper arms.
C
Check the condition of the wiper blades; replace damaged wiper blades
in order to reduce the risk of damage to the windows.
Instructions
• Roof wiper: Lift the wiper arm, press in the wiper blade's locking
catch (position A) and replace the wiper blade. Check that the
016943
wiper blade is locked in the correct position.

• Rear wiper: Lift the wiper arm, press in the wiper blade's locking
catch (position B) and replace the wiper blade. Check that the
wiper blade is locked in the correct position.
• Windscreen wipers: Loosen the wiper blade's attaching bolt
(position C), lift the wiper arm and replace the wiper blade. Fit
the attaching bolt (position C).

6 Inspection and maintenance – Air filter, engine 201
6.2.5 Air filter, engine

Air filter engine, general
Instructions
A
NOTE
Poorly filtered induction air can very quickly result in serious engine
damage.
The filter is changed by the service technician during scheduled

inspection and service. When the machine is used in very dusty air, the
filter may be clogged after a relatively short time.
In the induction system, between the engine and air filter (A), there's an
indicator (B) which shows red when the air filter is clogged.
The air filter has a dust reservoir (position C) which is normally emptied
during operation by vibration in the induction system. It can also be
emptied manually by shaking it.
Instructions
• Check the indicator regularly and contact service as soon as the
indicator shows a red signal.
• The indicator can be reset to zero.
C
016233
A. Position for air filter reservoir

B. Indicator for change
C. Dust reservoir

202 6 Inspection and maintenance – Cooling system
6.2.6 Cooling system

Cooling system, general
Coolant is filled in the system's expansion tank (position B). The coolant
A level with a cold engine must be visible in the sight glass (position C)
on the expansion tank.
Low coolant level is indicated via the event menu, see Event menu low
coolant level engine, description, page 88.
NOTE
B A low coolant level may cause engine damage or may cause the
engine to stop.
High coolant temperature is indicated via the event menu, see Event
menu engine coolant temperature, description, page 77.
Instructions
C
WARNING
016245
A. Position of the coolant container (expansion The cooling system is pressurised. Steam or hot
tank) coolant may jet out.
B. Filling point Risk of scalding/burn injuries!
C. Sight glass Open the filler cap very carefully when the engine is
warm. Wait until the coolant has cooled down before
topping up.
WARNING
Glycol and anti-corrosion agents are hazardous to
health.
Health hazard!
Handle with care. Avoid skin contact. Wear protective
glasses and protective gloves. In the event of skin
contact, wash the skin.
CAUTION
Use approved coolant.
Risk of engine damage, warranty invalidated.
Only use coolant approved by the engine supplier
when changing and topping up the coolant.
• Check the level in the expansion tank. Fill with coolant approved by
the engine supplier as required. For volume, see 9 Specifications,
page 243.

6 Inspection and maintenance – Engine oil 203
6.2.7 Engine oil

Engine oil, general
Instructions
MIN MAX
WARNING
C Avoid skin contact with oils and lubricants. Use
protective gloves.
The engine's oil filler pipe (position B) is located under the service
B cover in front of the cab on the machine's left-hand side. Engine
alternative Volvo TAD1360VE has oil level indication in the display,
engine alternative Cummins QSM11 has a dipstick.
Instructions
A • Engine alternative Volvo TAD1360VE has electronic level indication
in the display, engine alternative Cummins QSM11 has a dipstick.
Engine alternative Volvo TAD1360VE: Check the oil level via the
Operating menu, engine, in display one, see Engine operating
menu, description, page 71. Optimum oil level is 50%.
016941
Engine alternative Cummins QSM11: Engine alternative Cummins

QSM11 has a dipstick. Check on the dipstick (position C). Check
A. Position for filling point
the oil level when the engine is warm. The dipstick has a marked
B. Filling point area where the oil level should be. Optimum oil level is in the
centre of the area.
C. Dipstick engine oil (only engine alternative
Cummins QSM11) • Top up as required with new engine oil (position B). For volume
and quality, see 9 Specifications, page 243.
Engine alternative Volvo TAD1360VE: Top up - wait a moment -
start the machine and check the oil level in the display.
Engine alternative Cummins QSM11: Top up - wait a moment -
check.
NOTE
Work carefully when filling engine oil to prevent other fluids or
particles from contaminating the oil. Other fluids or particles in the
engine oil means a risk of engine damage.

204 6 Inspection and maintenance – Transmission oil
6.2.8 Transmission oil

Transmission oil, general
Instructions
COLD MIN MAX

WARNING
C protective gloves.
The transmission's oil filler pipe and dipstick (position B) are located
under the service cover in front of the cab.
B
Instructions
• Check the oil level.
Check the oil level with the engine idling and the transmission in
neutral position and at operating temperature (approx. 85 °C in
A
the display).
The dipstick has three markings. The lowest is marked "COLD"
and is a rough estimate of the level for cold transmission. The top
two are marked "HOT" and are the markings for the maximum,
"MAX", and minimum, "MIN", oil levels at operating temperature.
016940
The oil level must be between "MIN" and "MAX" with a hot
transmission when idling in neutral.
A. Position for filling point and level checking
• Wipe off the oil dipstick before checking.
B. Filling point
C. Oil dipstick NOTE
The oil dipstick is long. Wear gloves.
• Top up as required with new transmission oil (position B). For

volume and quality, see 9 Specifications, page 243).
It is recommended to fill the oil when the transmission is at
operating temperature. Top up – wait awhile – check on the
dipstick.
NOTE
Work carefully when filling transmission oil to prevent other fluids or
transmission oil means a risk of transmission damage.

6 Inspection and maintenance – Oil, brake system 205
6.2.9 Oil, brake system

Oil, brake system, general
Instructions
WARNING
A Avoid skin contact with oils and lubricants. Use
protective gloves.
The tank for the brake system is located on the machine's left side.
Instructions
• Check the oil level (position E).
The level should be in the middle of the sight glass.
• Top up as required with new oil (position C). For volume and
quality, see 9 Specifications, page 243).
• Check that the oil cooler (position B) is not clogged. Clean as
needed.
NOTE
016235
B E C D Work carefully when filling brake oil to prevent other fluids or

A. Oil tank for brake system brake oil means a risk of damage to the brake system.
B. Oil cooler
C. Filling point
D. Breather filter
E. Sight glass oil tank

206 6 Inspection and maintenance – Hydraulic system
6.2.10 Hydraulic system

Hydraulic system, general
Instructions
A B C D C E F G
WARNING
protective gloves.
The hydraulic oil tank is located on the machine's right side.

Instructions
• Check the oil level (position E). All hydraulic pistons should be in
retracted position (pushed in).
The level should be at the top of the sight glass.
• Top up as required with new oil (position F). For volume and quality,
016244
A. Position for oil cooler • Check that the oil cooler isn't clogged.
B. Position for hydraulic tank Clean as needed.
C. Cleaning filter hydraulic oil

NOTE
D. Filling point, hydraulic oil tank (reserve)
Work carefully when filling engine oil to prevent other fluids or
E. Sight glass, hydraulic oil tank particles from contaminating the oil. Other fluids or particles in the
F. Breather filter engine oil involve a risk of damage to the brake system or working
hydraulics.
G. Filling point, hydraulic oil tank

6 Inspection and maintenance – Hydraulic system 207
Emergency lowering of boom
DANGER
A
Manual operation entails risks!

Risk of crushing! Risk of roll-over! Extreme danger!
Avoid manual lowering. If manual lowering cannot be
avoided, work very carefully.
As long as there is servo pressure in the hydraulic system, as well as

battery voltage, the boom can be lowered using the control lever in the
cab. In the event that hydraulic functions stop working, emergency
lowering can take place with manual control of the valves.
A NOTE
Operate the boom with continuous control of the valves during the
whole boom movement (to use the remaining servo pressure). In
the event of repeated valve operation, the servo pressure is lost
B and no functions can be performed.
E C Instructions
1. Two persons, one on the right and one on the left side of the
F D machine, position themselves to control the solenoid valve for each
016236
respective lift cylinder (position A).

2. Turn the control knob anticlockwise to open the valve (area C).
A. Knob for operating the solenoid valve lift This releases the pressure in the lift cylinders.
cylinder
B. Valve closed NOTE
C. Valve opens proportionately with knob position Do this to both lift cylinders simultaneously.
D. Valve open (spring-loaded)
3. The boom is lowered slowly.
E. Area where the valve is closed
When the control knob is released the knob returns to closed,
F. Valve fully open (stops in this position) position B.
4. When lowering is complete, check that both knobs are in position B.

208 6 Inspection and maintenance – Tyres and rims
6.2.11 Tyres and rims

Tyres and rims, general
DANGER
Changing tyres is high-risk work.
Extreme danger!
Let service personnel change tyres, they have the
competence and authority to handle tyres!
DANGER
Penetrating objects such as crushed glass, pieces of
wood, metal shavings, etc. and mechanical defects,
such as uneven brake wear, can cause tyre damage.
Risk of tyre explosion! Extreme danger!
Check the tyres at regular intervals for external
damage and tyre pressure.
WARNING
Check-tighten the wheel nuts on a new wheel after 4-5
operating hours.
damage!
Tighten bolted joints crosswise. Contact a service
technician as required.
CAUTION
Spare and replacement tyres must be of brand names
approved by Cargotec.
Risk of overloaded tyres!
Use tyres approved by Cargotec.
IMPORTANT
Wheels, tyres and rims are dimensioned and selected
for each machine type so that maximum wheel loads
and travel speeds are not exceeded. For this reason it
is not permitted to change tyre dimension, tyre make,
tyre type, rim type, or rim make without approval from
Cargotec.

6 Inspection and maintenance – Tyres and rims 209
Changing wheel:
Changing wheels, see Maintenance manual.
DANGER
When changing tyres, deflate first.
Deflate tyres by loosening and removing the valve.
DANGER
Rim damage makes wheel handling extremely
dangerous!
Let service personnel change tyres, they have the
competence and authority to handle tyres!
CAUTION
Remove the sensors for tyre pressure monitoring
before the wheels are removed.
The sensors for tyre pressure monitoring are fitted on
the valves and may be damaged when the tyres are
handled.
Inflating tyres
Care of compressor for inflating tyres:
• An air filter with water separator should be installed in the line from
the compressor used for inflating tyres. The water filter minimises
the risk of corrosion on wheel rims.
• Drain the water separator regularly.
DANGER
Never stand in front of a tyre when inflating! Do not
exceed the prescribed air pressure which must be
checked at ambient temperature. When changing
tyre or rim version, another tyre pressure may apply,
contact Cargotec. The plate for tyre air pressure
must be replaced with a plate with the applicable tyre
pressure!
000384
Extreme danger!
Always follow instructions for inflating tyres to avoid
serious accidents.

210 6 Inspection and maintenance – Tyres and rims
Instructions
Instructions
1 2 3 1. Before inflating, make sure that the rim's lock ring is in the correct
position.
NOTE
If the tyre has been completely deflated, the rim must be dismantled
and checked for damage. Let service personnel change tyres, they
016974
have the competence and authority to handle tyres!
2. On machines with tyre pressure monitoring.

1. Lock ring
Only remove one sensor at a time in order to avoid mixing them
2. Rim edge up. Sensor locations are programmed into the monitoring system;
contact a service technician for reprogramming.
3. Tapered rim
3. Connect the compressor with a locking air-chuck to the nipple on
the tyre.
4. Stand at an angle behind the tyre and remain there until inflating
has been completed. This is to avoid being hit by rim parts in the
event of an explosion.
5. Inflate the tyre to the prescribed pressure, see chapter 9
Specifications. When changing tyre or rim version, another tyre
pressure may apply, contact Cargotec.
6. On machines with tyre pressure monitoring.
Refit the sensor for tyre pressure monitoring.

6 Inspection and maintenance – Checking accumulators 211
6.2.12 Checking accumulators

Accumulators, general
Instructions
The function of the accumulators (position A) is to maintain even brake

pressure and also to maintain brake pressure, and thus braking action,
a short time after eventual loss of hydraulic pressure.
A
The accumulators are precharged with nitrogen gas.
Instructions
Check for leakage according to the following points if the warning lamp
for low brake pressure (position 33) lights up:
1. Start the engine and let it run until the accumulators are filled.
Warning lamp for low brake pressure (position 33) goes off.
2. Stop the engine and then turn the start key to position I.
3. Press down the brake pedal with long pumping brake strokes, with
a slight delay between each braking action.
016237
4. It should be possible to brake at least eight times before the light

A for low brake pressure lights up.
A. Accumulators for brake system 5. Start the engine, let the accumulators charge and repeat the test
a couple of times.
If it is not possible to brake eight times before the warning lamp for
low brake pressure lights up, there is a defect in the accumulators.
Contact service immediately for troubleshooting and action.
WARNING
The machine's hydraulic system includes accumulators
with high pressure.
Always exercise extreme caution when working
with the hydraulic system and avoid unnecessarily
remaining close to hydraulic components or hoses.
The accumulators must be drained prior to work in the
hydraulic system (see Maintenance manual).

212 6 Inspection and maintenance – Central lubrication
6.2.13 Central lubrication

Central lubrication, general
Central lubrication (which replaces most of the manual lubrication)

consists of two pump units, one on the frame and one on the attachment
that lubricates selected lubrication points. The lubricant quantity can be
adjusted according to requirements, contact Cargotec Service.
NOTE
Cleanliness when performing work on the central lubrication system
is extremely important. Dirt and debris can cause disturbances
in the system. Naphtha or light petroleum can be used to clean
the system. Do not use e.g. Tri or other organic solvents such as
alcohol, methanol, acetone or the like.
Instructions
• Maintenance for central lubrication is the filling of lubricant and
A. Safety valve checking that all connected lubrication points receive sufficient
lubricant.
B. Filler nipple
• Fill the reservoir up to the "Max" mark through the filler nipple
(position B).
Lubricating grease must be clean from contaminants and must not
change consistency as it ages.
• If the reservoir has become completely empty and is then filled, the
pump may need to be operated for longer in order to provide all the
lubrication points with a sufficient amount of lubricant.
Operate the pump manually with the menu for machine check, see
Menu for machine check, description, page 185.

6 Inspection and maintenance – Battery and battery disconnector 213
6.2.14 Battery and battery disconnector

Battery and battery disconnector, general
WARNING
Short-circuiting of battery.
Risk of explosion! Fire hazard! Risk of personal injury!
The battery's terminals must not be connected to each
other or to common grounding point (frame).
CAUTION
Always turn off the system voltage at the end of your
shift, when working on the electrical system and when
welding on the machine.
Danger!
Turn off the system voltage with the battery
016247
A B disconnector. After the engine is turned off, wait a

while before switching off the system voltage. The
A. Battery disconnector diesel engine's control system performs actions,
depending on the model, up to two minutes after the
B. Battery cover
engine is turned off.
The electrical system works with a system voltage of 24 Volt (DC). The
power source consists of two series-connected 12 Volt (DC) batteries
which are charged by an AC alternator with rectifier. The negative
terminal is connected to the frame.
The plus terminal is connected to a battery disconnector (position A).
The batteries are located inside of a cover (position B) behind the steps
on the machine's left side.

214 6 Inspection and maintenance – Battery and battery disconnector
Starting with booster battery
WARNING
Handle batteries and connectors with great care during
charging and boosting (jump starting). Do not mix
up the battery terminals! Follow the instructions for
starting with a booster battery!
Danger of short circuit! Warning - risk of hydrogen gas
forming! Danger of sparks and fire! Hydrogen gas is
very explosive!
Batteries must always be equipped with covers over
terminals and connections. Connect positive terminals
first. Then connect the negative terminals in order to
avoid sparks that could ignite the hydrogen gas.
1 Switch off the system voltage with the battery disconnector

(position A).
2 Open the battery cover on the machine's left-hand side.
3 Check that the engine on the machine with booster batteries is
switched off.
4 Check that the booster batteries are connected in series so that
they supply 24 VDC. Do not disconnect the normal cables to the
machine's batteries.
5 Connect in the following order:
a. The red booster cable (+) to the discharged batteries' positive
terminal.
b. The red booster cable (+) to the booster batteries' positive
terminal.
c. The black booster cable (-) to the booster batteries' negative
terminal.
d. The black booster cable (-) to a point some distance from the
discharged batteries, e.g. by the negative cable's connection to
the frame or directly to the engine block.
6 Start the machine containing the booster batteries.
7 Make the system voltage with the battery disconnector.
8 Try to start the engine and then run the engine at increased idling
speed for approx. 10 minutes to charge the batteries.
Do not move the connections during the start attempt - risk of
sparks. Do not lean over any of the batteries.
9 Switch off the engines on both machines.
Disconnect the cables in the reverse order as to when connecting
them. One cable at a time! Batteries must always be equipped
with covers over terminals and connections.

6 Inspection and maintenance – Fuses for electrical system 215
6.2.15 Fuses for electrical system

Fuses for electrical system, general
The machine's electrical system is fuse-protected in three levels:
• Main fuses
A • Distribution fuses
• Fuses
The machine's electrical system is also divided into two electrical

power circuits:
• Battery voltage, i.e. the voltage output in the machine when the
battery disconnector is in position I.
• Ignition voltage, i.e. the voltage output in the machine when the
ignition key lock is in position I provided the battery disconnector
is in position I.
CAUTION
E Never use fuses with too high ampere rating.
Risk of cable damage or cable fire!
B Follow instructions on the fuse plate for fuse type and
ampere rating.
C
D
016238
Fuses on frame
A. Fuses in electronic box cab, F9968
B. Distribution fuses, F9952-2,
C. Distribution fuses, F9954-1
D. Fuses in the battery box, F9952-1
E. Fuses in electronic box frame, F9958

216 6 Inspection and maintenance – Fuses for electrical system
Main fuses
Main fuses
The machine's main fuses are located inside the battery cover for the
1 F9952-1
2 batteries on the left-hand side of the machine.
Table Main fuses F9952-1
Fuse number / Size Functions

1 / 100 A Fuses everything that is disconnected
with the main switch.
2 / 50 A Fuses everything that is not
disconnected with the main switch.
Instructions
1. Turn off the system voltage with the battery disconnector.
The engine must be switched off.
See Battery and battery disconnector, general, page 213.
2. Open the battery cover.
3. Check and change main fuses when necessary.
017860
Main fuse in the battery compartment on the frame

Distribution fuses
Distribution fuses
X500 X401 The machine's distribution fuses are located in the electronic box on
1 1
the left-hand side of the machine, rear boom mounting and at the front
of the boom.
2 2
Table Distribution fuses, ignition voltage F9954-1
Fuse number /
Size Functions
1 / 50 A Frame
2 / 50 A Cab
3 / 50 A Control unit KFU (D7971) and Control unit
KFU (D7972)
4 / 50 A Attachment
Table Distribution fuses, battery voltage F9952-2
Fuse number /
Size Functions
F9954-1
1 1 / 50 A Frame
F9952-2
2 1 2 / 50 A Cab
3
016240
Table Connection block voltage feed attachment X401 and X500

4 2
Distribution fuses in electronic box frame Fuse number /
Size Functions
1 / 50 A Voltage feed attachment
2 / 50 A Voltage feed attachment
Instructions
2. Remove the cover from the electronic box on the frame.
3. Remove the plastic cover.
The fuse plate gives information about each fuse.

218 6 Inspection and maintenance – Fuses for electrical system
Fuses
Fuses
The machine's fuses are located in the electronic box in the cab (F9968)
and in the electronic box on the left-hand side of the machine (F9958).
Table Fuses battery voltage frame F9958-RD

RD1 BK1 GN1
Fuse number / Functions
RD2 BK2 GN2 Size
RD3 BK3 GN3
RD1 / 15/10 A Control unit, engine (D7940) for Volvo
RD4 BK4 GN4 TAD1360VE and Control unit, engine
RD5 BK5 GN5 (D7940) for Cummins QSM11 (10 A)
RD6 BK6 GN6
RD2 / 30/10 A Power supply after-treatment system for
RD7 BK7 GN7 Volvo TAD1360VE and Control unit, engine
RD8 BK8 GN8
(D7940) for Cummins QSM11 (10 A)
RD3 / - -
RD4 / - -
RD5 / - -
RD6 / 5 A Control unit transmission (D7930) for

ZF5WG261
RD7 / - -
RD8 / 30 A -
Table Fuses ignition voltage frame F9958-BK

Size
BK1 / - -
BK2 / - -
BK3 / 5 A Start interlock

BK4 / - -
-
017863
BK5 / -
BK6 / 5 A Control unit (D7930) for transmission
Fuses in electronic box frame, F9958 ZF5WG261
BK7 / - -
BK8 / 5/15 A Horn, loud horn (15 A)
Table Fuses options frame F9958-GN

Size
GN1 / - -
GN2 / - -
GN3 / - -
GN4 / - -
GN5 / 10 A Constant-loading functions, timer diesel

heater
GN6 / - -
GN7 / 20 A Diesel heater

GN8 / - -

Fuses battery voltage cab F9968 RD
Table Fuses battery voltage cab F9968 RD

Size
RD1 BK1 GN1 RD1 / 5 A Start-up, start interlock

RD2 BK2 GN2 RD2 / 15 A Control unit KCU (D7901)
RD3 BK3 GN3
RD3 / - -
RD4 BK4 GN4
RD4 / 5 A Radio
RD5 BK5 GN5
RD6 BK6 GN6 RD5 / 10 A Service, RMI

RD7 BK7 GN7 RD6 / 10 A Customer-specific equipment
RD8 BK8 GN8
RD7 / - -
RD8 / 10 A -
Table Fuses ignition voltage cab F9968 BK

Size
BK1 / 10 A Control unit KPU (D7902), Control unit KID
(D7950), travel direction selector control
lever
BK2 / 10 A Service, RMI , distance warning system
back-up camera
BK3 / 10 A Monitor, back-up camera
BK4 / 5 A Radio
BK5 / 25 A Seat heating, seat belt, ventilation control
driver's seat
BK6 / 10 A 24 V socket cab, electrically operated
mirrors , Customer-specific equipment
017864
BK7 / 15 A Work lights

Fuses in electronic box cab, F9968 BK8 / 10 A Searchlight
Table Fuses options cab F9968 GN

Size
GN1 / 25 A Heated rear window
GN2 / 10 A Double wiper front window
GN3 / 10 A Voltage converter 12/24 VDC
GN4 / - -
GN5 / - -
GN6 / - -
GN7 / 20 A Inverter 220 V

GN8 / 10 A Compressor, air suspension driver's seat
, ventilation feed driver's seat

220 6 Inspection and maintenance – Lighting
Instructions
2. Remove the cover for the electronic box.
3. Remove the plastic cover.
The fuse plate gives information about each fuse.
6.2.16 Lighting
Lighting, general
It is important to use the right type of bulb for each respective lighting
point, see 9 Specifications, page 243.
Light bulbs can be changed for the following:

• Interior lighting
• Headlight with bulb (for high/low beam)
Headlights, work lights, direction indicators front, position lights,

combination lamp cluster rear (rear light, brake light & direction
A B C
indicator) are complete fittings and are replaced complete.
On machines with headlights with high and low beam, the bulb
can be replaced.
017967
D E F A
Lamp housing, front and rear
A. Position light
B. Direction indicator, front
C. Headlights
D. Back-up light
E. Brake and tail light
F. Direction indicator, rear

6 Inspection and maintenance – Service 221
6.3 Service
General
It's very important that inspections and service are performed at the
recommended intervals.
Service is performed by Cargotec, or by service technicians authorised

by Cargotec.
CAUTION
Service interval must be followed.
This is to maintain the machine's safety as well as to
meet warranty and service agreements!
Use spare parts and fluids approved by Cargotec in
order to fulfil warranty terms.
Service intervals and actions are described in the maintenance manual.
CAUTION
Undo the connectors from the control units.
Risk of damage to the control units!
When welding on the machine, all control units shall
be disconnected to prevent damage.

222 6 Inspection and maintenance – Service
WARNING
For safety reasons, the following spare parts may only
be replaced with genuine spare parts:
• Brake valve
• Drive axle
• Valve for mini steering wheel/joystick steering
• Steering valve (Orbitrol)
• Control valve steering incl. priority valve
• Steering axle
• Steering cylinder
• Steering spindle
• Hub
• Rim
• Lift boom
• Boom nose extension
• Lift cylinder
• Valve block lift cylinder
• Extension cylinder
• Valve block extension cylinder
• Rotation motor unit
• Tilt cylinder
• Twistlock, lift shoe
• Attachment assembly
• Lifting ears
• Control breaker (for hydraulic function)
• Emergency switch
• Cab
• Frame
• Accumulator
• Accumulator charging valve
• All control units

7 Transporting the machine 223
7 Transporting the machine

Safety
DANGER
The machine must be firmly secured for transport! The
machine is heavy and can cause extensive damage in
the event of a fall and similar.
damage!
Follow the instructions in order to secure the machine
during transport.
WARNING
Cab doors must always be closed when operating.
Risk of personal injury and crushing in case of
roll-over and tipping!
Always close the doors during the work shift.
WARNING
The cab is equipped with longitudinal sliding, manual
or hydraulic ( ). The cab must ALWAYS be secured
and locked during transport.
Risk that unsecured cab moves, which results in great
danger!
For manual sliding cab, always make sure that the cab
locks on both sides are locked in their rear position
before transport, and that the locks are secured with
the lock pins,
For hydraulic longitudinal displacement, the cab may
be positioned as desired (locking is automatic) when
stationary.

224 7 Transporting the machine – Towing
7.1 Towing
General
DANGER
The machine cannot be operated or braked if the
hydraulic pressure is lost, e.g., if the engine is off.
Rolling machine! Extreme danger!
If possible, tow with maintained hydraulic pressure.
If it's not possible to have the engine running when
towing, a tow bar must be used! Only tow for short
distances!
CAUTION
Do not try to start the machine by towing.
Causes serious damage to engine and power
transmission!
Start the engine according to instructions in the
operator's manual.
Before taking actions and after finished towing, the parking brake
must be applied and the wheels blocked to prevent the machine from
starting to roll.
Extreme care must be observed during towing work to avoid personal

injuries.
When towing, keep in mind:

• The towing vehicle should be heavier than the vehicle in tow.
• If possible when towing, the engine should be running in order for
brakes and steering to function.
When the engine is switched off, there is no hydraulic pressure for
the steering function and thus the machine's steering function is
severely limited. Also, the transmission lubrication is insufficient.
• The brakes function as long as there is pressure in the
accumulator/accumulators, then the service brake stops
functioning and the parking brake is applied automatically. If it is
necessary to move/tow the machine after that, the parking brake
must be released mechanically, see section 7.1.1 Mechanical
release of parking brake.
• Only tow for very short distances.
• If it is necessary to tow the machine, the propeller shaft must be
released from both transmission and drive axle.

7 Transporting the machine – Mechanical release of parking brake 225
7.1.1 Mechanical release of parking brake

Description
The parking brake is applied automatically by a forceful spring in the
brake cylinder if the pressure in the hydraulic accumulator should drop
below a certain level.
If the machine has to be moved (towed) without sufficient pressure

in the hydraulic accumulator, the parking brake must be released
mechanically (manually).
DANGER
Before starting to work with the parking brake, make
sure that the machine cannot move when the braking
action is released.
Rolling machine! Extreme danger!
Block the wheels to avoid unwanted rolling of the
machine.
CAUTION
The parking brake has high spring force. If the brakes
are opened incorrectly, parts may detach and fly off
with great force.
Follow the instructions.
The parking brake is a disc brake with two brake calipers on the drive
A B axle's input shaft.
1 Remove the protective cover from the brake caliper (position A).
2 Grip the adjusting screw (position C) and loosen the lock nut
(position B).
3 Note the position of the adjusting screw (position C), for example,
by counting rotations when it is turned.
C 4 Turn the adjusting screw (position C) until the brake pads release
from the brake disc.
NOTE
If the parking brake has been released mechanically, the parking
brake must always be restored in order to give the machine
5 Restore the parking brake function by turning the adjusting screw

to the same position as in step 3.
Send the machine for service as soon as possible for checking and
adjustment of the parking brake.
6 Refit protective cover on the caliper.
017920
A. Protective cover
B. Lock nut
C. Adjusting screw

226 7 Transporting the machine – Lifting and transporting the machine
7.2 Lifting and transporting the

machine
General
When lifting and transporting the machine, follow the governing safety
regulations.
DANGER
High demands are made of the lifting and transport
equipment, e.g. lifting chains, hooks, etc.
Extreme danger!
Check the equipment and its capacity, lifting slings on
the machine as well as lashing points on the transport
vehicle and machine.
DANGER
Overload of load equipment.
Extreme danger!
Lifting equipment must be dimensioned for the load.
Never walk under hanging loads.
The following action must be taken when the machine is to be

transported:
• Apply parking brake.
• Turn off the system voltage with the battery disconnector.
• Remove any fragile equipment, e.g. rear view mirrors.
Transport of machine on public roads takes place in accordance with

the following:
1 Lift the attachment: see Removing the top lift attachment, page
227.
Lift the boom: see Removing the boom, page 229.
NOTE
Only needed if transport takes place on public roads.
2 Secure the machine for transport on, e.g. a trailer. Note the
machine's weight, see machine plate.
Position the machine, boom and attachment on the transport. See
Lashing down for transport, page 232.
3 Unload the machine from the transport. See Unloading the
machine, page 235.
4 Lift boom: see Installing the boom, page 236.
Lift attachment: see Installing the top lift attachment, page 237.

7 Transporting the machine – Lifting machine 227
7.2.1 Lifting machine

Instructions
The machine shall be lifted as follows:
1 Lay two lifting slings in both front lifting eyes on the frame.
2 Lay two lifting slings in both rear lifting eyes on the frame (at the
boom mounting).
3 The lifting device must be adapted so that the lifting point runs
through the machine's centre of gravity.
016254
7.2.2 Transporting the machine

Removing the top lift attachment
WARNING
Pressurised oil system.
Always depressurise the hydraulic system before
starting to work in the hydraulic system.
1 Park the machine with the boom fully retracted in its lowest position
and the attachment in right-hand position.
2 Switch off the engine and open the relief valve for the attachment.
A
Relief valve attachment opens a connection between the
attachment's pressure feed and tank. This is used to drain the
pressure in the hoses for the attachment before working on the
hydraulic system. The relief valve is located at the trailing edge
of the lift beam in front of the transmission.
3 Turn the start key to position I and activate the hydraulic functions
to depressurise the hydraulic system.
4 Turn the start key to position 0 and switch off the system voltage
with the battery disconnector.
5 Place a collection container under the valve block on the boom
nose to collect any oil spills.
016253
A. Relief valve for attachment

228 7 Transporting the machine – Transporting the machine
6 Mark up and disconnect the attachment's hydraulic connections

from the damping block.
NOTE
Plug all connections immediately to protect the hydraulic system
from contaminants.
7 Release the cable harness for the attachment from the cable
harness on the boom.
Remove the cable harness' clamping from the boom.
NOTE
Plug all connectors with each other. Connectors that cannot be
plugged with other connectors are plugged with sealed dummy
connectors
8 Disconnect the tilt cylinders from the attachment.

Remove the tilt cylinders' shafts and turn aside the tilt cylinders.
If necessary, use a puller to press out the shaft. Refit the shafts
in the tilt cylinder.
9 Remove the collection container, handle the waste oil as
environmentally hazardous waste.
10 Connect lifting equipment securely to the attachment's lifting eyes
11 Adjust the lifting equipment so that the shafts on the rotation bar
are unloaded.
12 Remove the rotation bar's shafts.
Remove the lock bolts and pull out the shaft. If necessary, use two
bolts in the threaded holes to pull out the shaft.
13 Lift aside the attachment. Position it on wooden blocks or similar
so that the twistlocks are not damaged.
14 Refit the rotation bar's shafts in the rotation bar.

7 Transporting the machine – Transporting the machine 229
Removing the boom
11 1 2 10
12
003690
9 8 7 8 6 5 4 3
1. Outer boom 7. Lift cylinder

2. Inner boom 8. Mounting lift cylinder
3. Tilt cylinder right-hand side 9. Rear boom mounting
4. Mounting attachment 10. Front lifting eyes
5. Tilt cylinder left-hand side 11. Rear lifting eyes
6. Extension cylinder 12. Valve block boom nose
DANGER
A lift cylinder weighs approx. 2 tonnes.
Extreme danger!
Use wooden blocks as protection between cab and
lift cylinder when the lift cylinder is lowered or lifted.
Secure the lift cylinders with tensioning straps in
between them.
WARNING
The boom may move when the shafts are removed.
Make sure that the shafts are unloaded. Stand to
the side of the boom attachment so that it provides
protection in the event of any movement.

CAUTION
The boom may drop.
Be certain to compensate for the lift cylinder's support
of the boom by lifting the boom's leading edge with
the lifting equipment.
CAUTION
Short circuit.
Product damage, moisture and dirt.
Use contacts with blind plugs at both ends to insulate
and protect all connectors that are unplugged.
The instruction requires that the top lift attachment has been removed,
see Removing the top lift attachment, page 227.
1 Place a collection container under the hydraulic oil connections at
the boom's rear mounting to collect any spills.
2 Clean, mark up, disconnect and plug the hydraulic hoses at the
boom's rear mounting. Detach the hoses from the hose bracket.
Right-hand side, hydraulic hoses for boom.
Left-hand side, hydraulic hoses for attachment.
NOTE
Plug all connections immediately to protect the hydraulic system
from contaminants.
3 Remove the collection container, treat spills as environmentally

hazardous waste.
4 Mark up and disconnect the cable harness from the boom at the
rear mounting.
NOTE
Plug all contacts to protect them from dirt and moisture.
5 Slide the cab completely forward.

6 Secure the setting of the boom angle sensor, allow the sensor to
remain on the boom but affix the sensor's arm with a cable tie.
7 Connect lifting equipment securely at the front of the boom. Lift the
front of the boom so that the lift cylinders are unloaded.
8 Connect lifting equipment to the lift cylinder.
9 Disconnect the lift cylinders from the boom.
Remove the lock bolt and the shaft. If necessary, use pullers to
pull out the shaft.
CAUTION
Angle sensor
The bearings are lubricant-free and must not be
lubricated.
Product damage.
The slide surface of the bearings is specially treated
and must not be lubricated. When fitting the shafts,
exercise additional caution and ensure that the
lubricant does not come into contact with the slide
surface of the bearings. After assembly, apply
anti-corrosion protection to the bearings externally
with a thin layer of Teflon spray.
10 Carefully lower each lift cylinder so that it rests against the edge
on the lower mounting.
Use wooden blocks as protection between cab and lift cylinder
when the lift cylinder is lowered or lifted. Secure the lift cylinders
with tensioning straps in between them.
11 Refit the shaft in the boom's bearing.
12 Connect the lifting equipment securely in the lifting eyes in the
boom's trailing edge. Lift slightly to unload the boom's rear
bearings.
13 Remove the shafts for the boom mounting.
14 Lift away the boom, lower the front part and place it on a secure
surface, e.g. wooden blocks.
15 Depressurise the tilt cylinders.
Loosen the hydraulic hoses' connections at the valve block on
the boom nose.
Place a collection container under the valve block to collect any
oil spills.
NOTE
The tilt cylinders must be drained to allow the rear part of the
boom to be laid down.
16 Lower the rear part of the boom and place it on a secure surface,
e.g. wooden blocks.
17 Tighten the tilt cylinders' hydraulic hoses at the valve block on
the boom nose.
18 Remove the collection containers, handle the waste oil as
Valve block boom nose

Lashing down for transport

The instruction requires that the top lift attachment and boom have
been removed, see Removing the top lift attachment, page 227 and
Removing the boom, page 229.
When transporting the machine, boom and attachment must be

transported separately. The machine must be transported on a trailer
that is wide enough to support the drive axle's inner wheel.
1 Reverse the machine up on the trailer.
2 Apply parking brake.
3 Turn off the system voltage with the battery disconnector.
4 Machine with vertically adjustable cab:
On machines with vertically adjustable cab, lower the cab frame,
see Lowering the frame for vertically adjustable cab, page 234.
5 Secure the front part of the machine adequately in the front of the
frame and in the intended attachment points on the trailer.
Cross the chains when securing for optimal stability.
Lashing down machine, front
6 Secure the rear part of the machine adequately in the rear of the
frame and in the intended attachment points on the trailer.
7 Fold in the rear-view mirrors and remove protruding parts, such as
the rotating beacon, to prevent damage during transport.
Lashing down machine, rear

8 Place the boom's rear part on anchored pallets or similar.

Secure the boom's rear part adequately in the boom's lifting eyes
and in the intended attachment points on the trailer.
Lashing down boom, rear
9 Secure the boom's front part adequately in the boom's lifting eyes
and in the intended attachment points on the trailer.

10 Place the attachment on wooden blocks or similar to protect the

twistlocks.
Secure both sides of the attachment adequately in the attachment
lifting eyes and in the intended attachment points on the trailer.
Lashing down of attachment
Lowering the frame for vertically adjustable cab
1 Empty the cab of all loose objects and pack them away safely.
2 Remove the ladder from the cab frame and refit the brackets on
the frame.
3 Connect lifting equipment to the top of the cab frame. Adjust the
lifting equipment so that the cab frame is secured from tipping
over backwards.
4 Remove the diagonal stay behind the cab frame.
Connect lifting equipment to the diagonal stay and lift so that the
shafts are unloaded. Remove the shafts and lift the stay aside.
CAUTION
The cab frame may tip over.
Risk of personal injury and product damage.
Allow the lifting equipment on the cab frame to be
connected until the rear mounting is fully secured.
Exercise caution and adapt the lifting equipment on
the cab frame so that the cab frame does not start
unwanted movement.
017935
5 Refit the upper shafts to the diagonal stay in the cab frame.
Diagonal stay, cab frame
6 Carefully tilt the cab frame backward until the bracket on the
left-hand side of the cab frame is in the centre of the rear bracket
for the diagonal stay. Install the rear mounting's shaft in order to
secure the parts.
017934
Rear bracket, diagonal stay.

Unloading the machine

1 Machine with vertically adjustable cab:
Reset the cab frame, see Resetting the frame for vertically
adjustable cab, page 235.
2 Remove the load safety catch from the machine.
3 Extend and adjust the rear view mirrors, and reset protruding parts,
such as the revolving beacon, that were removed during transport.
Resetting the frame for vertically adjustable cab
1 Connect lifting equipment to the top of the cab frame.

2 Remove the shaft at the rear mounting of the cab frame.
Raise the lifting equipment so that the shaft at the rear mounting
of the cab frame is unloaded.
3 Carefully move the cab frame up to vertical position.
CAUTION
The cab frame may tip over.
Risk of personal injury and product damage.
017934
Allow the lifting equipment on the cab frame to be

Rear bracket, diagonal stay. connected until the rear mounting is fully secured.
Exercise caution and adapt the lifting equipment on
the cab frame so that the cab frame does not start
unwanted movement.
4 Install the diagonal stay behind the cab frame.

Connect the lifting equipment to the stay and lift it into place so that
the shafts can be fitted.
5 Install the ladder on the cab frame.
6 Replace the equipment that has been emptied out from the cab.
017935
Diagonal stay, cab frame

Installing the boom
WARNING
Pressurised oil system.
Always depressurise the hydraulic system before
starting to work in the hydraulic system.
The instruction requires that top lift attachment and boom are not
assembled, i.e. are separate.
1 Place the cab in the front position.
2 Switch off the engine and open the relief valve for the attachment.
3 Turn the start key to position I and activate the hydraulic functions
to depressurise the hydraulic system.
A
4 Turn the start key to position 0 and switch off the system voltage
with the battery disconnector.
5 Connect lifting equipment at the leading edge and trailing edge of
the boom.
6 Lift the boom into place over the machine.
7 Adjust the boom's position so that the holes for the boom's
bearings in the boom and frame are lined up.
NOTE
If sensor boom angle is still on the boom, fit the sensor's arm in
the lock screw without turning the sensor's arm.
8 Fit the rear shafts for the boom's bearing.

9 Disconnect the lifting equipment from the boom's trailing edge.
10 Lower the boom's leading edge so that it is horizontal.
016253
11 Connect lifting equipment to one of the lift cylinders.

12 Align the lift cylinder's upper mounting in the boom.
The illustration shows open valve
Lift the lift cylinder into place, if necessary adjust the angle of the
boom.
CAUTION
The bearings are lubricant-free and must not be
lubricated.
Product damage.
The slide surface of the bearings is specially treated
and must not be lubricated. When fitting the shafts,
exercise additional caution and ensure that the
lubricant does not come into contact with the slide
surface of the bearings. After assembly, apply
anti-corrosion protection to the bearings externally
with a thin layer of Teflon spray.
13 Fit the lift cylinder's shaft.

14 Lower the boom and disconnect the lifting equipment from the
boom.
15 Place a collection container under the hydraulic oil connections at
the boom's rear mounting to collect any spills.

16 Connect the boom's hydraulic hoses to the machine.
NOTE
Replace the O-rings. Check that the O-rings are in the correct
position.
17 Connect the cable harness to the boom.

18 If the machine is equipped with position sensor for boom angle, fit
the bracket and sensor boom angle.
19 Grease the boom's rear bearings with lubricating grease EP2.
20 Check that the tilt cylinders' hoses are securely tightened.
21 Remove the collection containers, handle the waste oil as
Installing the top lift attachment
CAUTION
Do not overfill!
Leakage and environmental damage!
The hydraulic oil level is checked with the boom
completely lowered and retracted.
The instruction requires that the boom is mounted on the machine, see
Installing the boom, page 236. The boom must be in lowered position.
1 Remove the rotation bar's shafts from the rotation bar.
2 Clean and grease the bearing surfaces for mounting and tilt
cylinders on the attachment with lubricating grease EP2.
3 Connect lifting equipment securely to the attachment's lifting eyes.
4 Lift the attachment into position. Align the attachment so that the
holes for the shafts in the boom line up with the holes for the shafts
in the rotation bar.
5 Clean and grease the attachment's mounting pins with lubricating
grease EP2 before installing.
6 Fit the attachment's mounting pins and fit the lock bolts.
7 Clean and apply aluminium paste, e.g., Loctite 8150, on the tilt
cylinders' link bearings and shafts.
8 Connect the tilt cylinders to the attachment.
Align the tilt cylinder and press in the pin. Fit the lock bolt. If
necessary, loosen the hydraulic connections on the tilt cylinder to
enable adjustment of the tilt cylinder's length.

9 Remove the plugs and connect the attachment's hydraulic hoses

to the valve block on the boom nose.
NOTE
Replace the O-rings. Check that the O-rings are in the correct
position.
10 Connect the attachment's cable harness to the cable harness on

the boom.
Fit the cable harness' clamping for the boom.
11 Grease the attachment's bearing with lubricating grease EP2.

12 Switch on the system voltage with the battery disconnector.
13 Start the engine.
14 Check that the hydraulic connections are sealed tightly.
15 Check the attachment's functions.
16 Check the oil level in the hydraulic oil tank with the lift cylinders
completely down and the extension cylinder completely in. The oil
level should be at the top of the sight glass. Top up if necessary.
1 0: 23
17 Check the angle sensor:
MACHI NE CHECK a. Contact service technician.
b. Use the menu for machine check to check the sensor, see
3 53 80 kg a Menu for machine check, description, page 185.
2. 30 m b • Lower the boom to the lowest position. Check that the
value (d) is 0° ± 0.2°.
4. 07 m c • Raise the boom to its maximum angle and check that the
30 . 6 ° d value (d) is within the tolerances, see below.
016366
Max. lifting height Maximum boom angle
Menu for checking the scale 5 containers 60.3° ± 0.2°
d. Shows boom angle in degrees. 6 containers 62.0° ± 0.2°
18 Check the overload system.

Lift a loaded container approx. 1 metre. Operate the boom out and
check that the overload system is activated.
016335

7 Transporting the machine – Service position 239
7.3 Service position

General
Service position is used for service, maintenance and other situations
when the machine needs to be secured.
Service position entails:

• The machine is parked, i.e. parking brake applied.
• Boom fully retracted and lowered to horizontal position.
• Engine off.
• System voltage switched off with battery disconnector.
016252

240 7 Transporting the machine – Long-term storage
7.4 Long-term storage

General
For long-term storage of the machine, contact Cargotec.

8 Environment and standards 241
8 Environment and
standards
General
The ever-increasing industrialisation of our world is having a significant
impact on our global environment. Nature, animals and people are
subjected daily to risks in connection with various forms of chemical
handling.
There are still no fully environmentally safe chemicals, such as oils and
coolants, available on the market. Therefore, all who handle, perform
service on or repair machines must use the tools, assisting devices and
methods necessary to protect the environment in an environmentally
sound manner.
By following the simple rules below, you will contribute to protecting

our environment.
Recycling
Conscientious recycling of the machine is the starting point for the life
cycle to come full circle, and for being able to recycle and make use of
material in new products. According to calculations by Cargotec, the
machine is more than 90% recyclable by weight.
Environmentally hazardous waste

Components such as batteries, oils, and various chemicals and other
items that may constitute environmentally hazardous waste must be
handled and taken care of in an environmentally safe and sound
manner.
Discarded batteries contain substances hazardous to personal health

and the environment. Therefore, handle batteries in an environmentally
safe manner and according to national regulations.
Oils and fluids

Oils freely discharged cause environmental damage and can also be a
fire hazard. Therefore, when emptying and draining oils or fuel, take
appropriate action to prevent unnecessary spills.
Waste oils and fluids should always be taken care of by an authorised

disposal company.
Pay close attention to oil leaks and other fluid leaks! Take immediate
action to seal the leaks.
Air conditioning
The refrigerant in the air conditioning for the cab adds to the
"greenhouse effect" if released into the open air. Special training is
required for all service work on the air conditioning. Many countries
also require certification by a governing authority for such work. When
scrapping an air conditioning unit, the refrigerant shall be taken care
of by a certified company.
Working in a contaminated area

The machine must be equipped for work in contaminated areas
(environmentally polluted or health-hazardous area) before work is
started. Also, there are special local rules in force for such handling
and when servicing such a machine.

242 8 Environment and standards – Environment and standards
Declarations
The machine does not contain asbestos.
The machines contains lead in batteries and in electric cabling.
If the machine is equipped with air conditioning then refrigerant of type

R134a is used.
Standards
CE-marking
Machines for the EU/EEA market are CE-marked. This means that
upon delivery the machine fulfils the applicable "Essential Health
and Safety Requirements" specified in the EU Machine Directive,
2006/42/EC, as well as other EU directives relevant to this machine
type. For more information, see section 2.2 CE-marking.
ANSI/ITSDF marking
Versions of this machine for North America are ANSI/ITSDF-marked.
This means that, when delivered, the machine fulfils the basic safety
requirements specified in ANSI/ITSDF B56.1. For more information,
see section 2.3 ANSI/ITSDF-marking.
EMC, electromagnetic interference

The EU's EMC directive regarding "Electromagnetic compatibility",
2004/108/EC, gives a general description of the standards that may be
required of a machine from a safety aspect, where the limit values have
been established in international standards. A machine or device that
meets these standards should be CE-marked.
Cargotec machines are specially tested with regards to electromagnetic

interference in accordance with harmonised standard EN12895.
The machine's CE-marking and declaration of conformity also cover
the EMC directive. If other electronic equipment is installed on the
machine, it must be CE-marked and tested on the machine with regards
to electromagnetic interference. It must also be approved by Cargotec.
Exhaust emissions
Machines for the EU/EEA market fulfil EU\qs Exhaust directive
97/68/EC and 2004/26/EC, which means that the engine's exhaust
emissions have been limited according to the requirements.
Machines for the North American market fulfil EPA\qs and CARB\qs
exhaust regulations, which means that engine exhaust emissions have
been limited according to the requirements.
Noise emissions
The sound pressure level in the cab is measured in accordance with
EN 12053 with measurement uncertainty σR=2.5 dB.
Vibration standard
Vibration emitted by the machine is measured according to harmonised
standard EN 13059, where the level of vibration varies depending on
with which type of tyres and driver's seat the machine is equipped. See
section 9 Specifications.

9 Specifications 243
9 Specifications
Data
The machine's weights and dimensions vary depending on how the
machine is equipped. Detailed information regarding this is given in the
product specification and data sheet for the machine in question.
1 Engine Volvo TAD1360VE Cummins QSM11

Power acc. to ISO 3046 (net power) 256 kW between 1500 – 1900 rpm 277 kW at 1700 – 1800 rpm
Torque ISO 3046 1745 Nm at 1000 – 1400 rpm 1830 Nm between 1100 – 1400 rpm
Max. rotation speed 2000 rpm 2000 rpm
Number of cylinders 6 cylinders 6 cylinders
Alternator, output 28 V / 150 A) 28 V / 100 A
System voltage, voltage – capacity 24 V (2x12 V / 145 Ah) 24 V (2x12 V / 145 Ah)
2 Transmission ZF 5WG261
No. of gears, forward - reverse 5 – 3
3.3 Power transmission, drive axle Kessler

Drive axle, type Kessler D102
4 Brakes
Footbrake system – wheel affected Wet Disc Brake – drive wheel

Parking brake system – wheel affected Spring brake - drive wheel
5. Steering
Steering system Hydraulic servo
6. Wheels DRG420 DRG450 DRG450

Dimension, front and rear 18.00x25/36 18.00x25/40 18.00x33/36
Tyre pressure, also see pressure plate 1.0 MPa
Tyre type, front and rear Inflated with air. Spare and replacement tyres must be of
brand names approved by Cargotec.
9 Cab
Equivalent sound pressure level in cab LpAZ 72 dB(A)
according to EN12053 with measurement
uncertainty σR=2.5 dB. Measurement value
with standard engine.
Whole-body vibrations according to EN13059 0.5 m/s2
with measurement uncertainty k=0.3 x
measured value.

244 9 Specifications – Specifications
Lamp Output (W) Socket

Direction indicator, front - LEDs are replaced complete
Tail lights, brake lights & direction indicators rear - LEDs are replaced complete
Position lamps - LEDs are replaced complete
Headlights - LEDs are replaced complete
Headlights with high and low beam 75/70 P43t-38 (H4)
Back-up light - LEDs are replaced complete
Work lights - LEDs are replaced complete
Revolving beacon - LEDs are replaced complete
Interior lighting - Replaced complete
Volumes
Any deviation from this table must be approved in writing by Cargotec.
1.2 Engine, fuel system Volvo TAD1360VE Cummins QSM11

Fuel tank, volume 550 l
Fuel quality EN590
ASTM D 975 No 1-D
ASTM D 975 No 2-D
CAUTION
Use only the fuel of approved quality.
Only fuel of a quality that is approved by the engine
supplier may be used.
AdBlue tank, volume 20 l -
AdBlue quality AdBlue, according to ISO -

standard 22241.
1.7 Engine, cooling system Volvo TAD1360VE Cummins QSM11

Coolant volume Total: 45 l Total: 38 l
Coolant filling point Volvo Penta Coolant VCS, ES Compleat, Premix
ready-mixed.
See Oils and lubricants, recommendation, page 246.
CAUTION
Use approved coolant.
Only use coolant approved by the engine supplier when
changing and topping up the coolant.

9 Specifications – Specifications 245
1.8 Engine, lubrication system Volvo TAD1360VE Cummins QSM11

Oil volume incl. filter Total: 28 l Total: 34 l
Oil type, quality See Oils and lubricants, recommendation, page 246.
2.6 Transmission, lubrication system ZF 5WG261

Oil volume incl. filter Total: 50 l
3.3 Power transmission, drive axle Kessler D102

Oil volume, differential Total: 72 l
Oil volume, hub reduction Total: 2x12 l
4 Brakes
Oil tank brake system, volume 148 l
7 Load handling Spreading (positioning) motor Rotation motor

Oil volume, planetary gear, hydraulic motor 2.3 l 2.45 l
attachment
Oil volume, disc brake, hydraulic motor - 0.6 l
attachment
9 Frame, body, cab and accessories Volvo TAD1360VE Cummins QSM11

Refrigerant air conditioning R134a
Volume refrigerant 2000 g
Lubricant air conditioning ZXL100PG
Volume, lubricant 0.3 l
Washer fluid 3.5 l
10 Common hydraulics
Oil volume, hydraulic oil tank 600 l
Oil volume, hydraulic system 900 l (total, incl. tank)

Oils and lubricants, recommendation

The service intervals specified by Cargotec in the maintenance manual
require that oils are selected in accordance with the table below. The
table indicates recommended viscosity for different oil types, and
grades, depending on the outdoor temperature.
Any deviation from this table must be approved in writing by Cargotec,

and may mean changed service intervals.
°C -40 -30 -20 -10 0 +10 +20 +30 +40

Oil type, quality F -40 -22 -4 +14 +32 +50 +68 +86 104
1.8 Engine, lubrication system
Volvo TAD1360VE: VDS-3 SAE 15W40 (motor oil)
Cummins QSM11 : API CH-4 or ACEA E5 SAE 5W30 (motor oil)
2.6 Transmission, lubrication system

API: CD/CE/CF-4/CF/CG-4/ CH-4/CI- SAE 10W, 10W/30, 10W/40
4/SF/SG/SH/SJ/SL
SAE 15W/30, 15W/40
ACEA: Categories A, B, E
SAE 20W/20, 20W/40
SAE 30
3.3 Power transmission, drive axle

API GL-5 SAE 80W140
SAE 75W90
4 Brakes (UTTO-oil, Note 1)

GM Allison C-4 SAE 5W30 (transmission oil)
John Deere J20 C, D
Caterpillar TO-4
7 Load handling
Oil planetary gear hydraulic motor, hypoid oil SAE 80W140
API GL-5
SAE 75W90
Disc brake hydraulic motor, See 10 Common
hydraulics below
10 Common hydraulics
DIN 51524 Part 3 HVLP ISO VG 68
ISO VG 46 HV
ISO VG 32

WARNING
Change interval for engine oil requires that the sulphur
content in the fuel does not exceed 0.5%.
Higher sulphur content in the fuel damages the engine
and after-treatment system!
Only use fuel with a sulphur content that does not
exceed 0.5%.
NOTE
Oil filters must be changed in connection with oil change.
Note 1: The oil in the brake system has to meet one of the quality
requirements.
ACEA = Association des Constructeurs Européenne d'Automobiles
API = American Petroleum Institute
CES = Cummins Engine Standard
VDS = Volvo Drain Specification
Lubricating grease
Use a universal grease type EP in accordance with NLGI Grade 2 (EP2)
for all lubrication points except for lifting equipment and slide plates.
For lifting equipment use a universal grease type EP in accordance

with NLGI Grade 2 (EP2) with 3-5% molybdenum disulphide mixture.
For slide plates use a lubricant approved by Cargotec. Obtained from

Cargotec Spare Parts Department. 0.65 kg cartridge for grease gun
part. no 923110.0360 and 5 kg tin part. no 923595.0003.
NOTE
Select lubricant class according to the prevailing climate.
Contact grease
Use contact grease part no. 923836.0552. Applies for sealed
connectors.
Sealant silicone
Use silicone part. no. 923107.0308.
Silicone adhesive
Use silicone adhesive part. no. 923854.0100.
Adhesive system for window panes

Only use PU polymer recommended by Cargotec.

Unit explanations
Unit Abbreviation
Newton metre Nm
Kgf/m kpm
Kilo pascal kPa
Mega pascal MPa
Kilowatt kW
Kilojoule kJ
British thermal unit Btu
Calorie ca
Inch in
Feet ft
Yard yd
Mile mile
Centimetre cm
Metre m
Kilometre km

Conversion SI-units
Recalculation Recalculation
SI-unit factor Non-SI factor SI
Torque
Nm x 10.2 = kg·cm x 0.8664 = lb·in
Nm x 0.74 = lbf·ft x 1.36 = Nm
Nm x 0.102 = kg·m x 7.22 = lb·ft
Pressure (Pa = N/m2)
kPa x 4.0 = in.H2O x 0.249 = kPa
kPa x 0.30 = in.Hg x 3.38 = kPa
kPa x 0.145 = psi x 6.89 = kPa
bar x 14.5 = psi x 0.069 = bar
kp/cm 2 x 14.22 = psi x 0.070 = kp/cm2
N/mm 2 x 145.04 = psi x 0.069 = bar
MPa x 145 = psi x 0.00689 = MPa
Power (W = J/s)
kW x 1.36 = hp (cv) x 0.736 = kW
kW x 1.34 = bhp x 0.746 = kW
kW x 0.948 = Btu/s x 1.055 = kW
W x 0.74 = ft·lb/s x 1.36 = W
Energy (J = Nm)
kJ x 0.948 = Btu x 1.055 = kJ
J x 0.239 = calorie x 4.19 = J
Speed and acceleration
m/s2 x 3.28 = ft/s2 x 0.305 = m/s2
m/s x 3.28 = ft/s x 0.305 = m/s
km/h x 0.62 = mph x 1.61 = km/h
Horsepower/torque
Bhp x 5252 rpm= TQ (lb·ft) TQ x rpm 5252 = bhp
Temperature
°C = (°F – 32)/1.8 °F = (°C x 1.8) + 32
Flow factor
l/min (dm3 /min) x 0.264 = US gal/min x 3.785 = litre/min

Conversion table length

Unit cm m km in ft yd mile
cm 1 0.01 0.00001 0.3937 0.03281 0.01094 0.000006
m 100 1 0.001 39.37 3.2808 1.0936 0.00062
km 100000 1000 1 39370.7 3280.8 1093.6 0.62137
in 2.54 0.0254 0.000025 1 0.08333 0.02777 0.000015
ft 30.48 0.3048 0.000304 12 1 0.3333 0.000189
yd 91.44 0.9144 0.000914 36 3 1 0.000568
mile 160930 1609.3 1.6093 63360 5280 1760 1
1 mm = 0.1 cm – 1 mm = 0.001 m
Conversion table area

Unit cm2 m2 km2 a ft2 yd2 in2
cm2 1 0.0001 - 0.000001 0.001076 0.000012 0.155000
m2 10000 1 0.000001 0.01 10.764 1.1958 1550.000
km2 - 1000000 1 10000 1076400 1195800 -
a 0.01 100 0.0001 1 1076.4 119.58 -
ft2 - 0.092903 - 0.000929 1 0.1111 144.000

yd2 - 0.83613 - 0.008361 9 1 1296.00
in2 6.4516 0.000645 - - 0.006943 0.000771 1
1 ha = 100 a – 1 mile2 = 259 ha = 2.59 km2
Conversion table volume

Unit cm3 = cc m3 l in3 ft3 yd3
cm3 = ml 1 0.000001 0.001 0.061024 0.000035 0.000001
m3 1000000 1 1000 61024 35.315 1.30796
dm3 (l) 1000 0.001 1 61.024 0.035315 0.001308
in3 16.387 0.000016 0.01638 1 0.000578 0.000021
ft3 28316.8 0.028317 28.317 1728 1 0.03704
yd3 764529.8 0.76453 764.53 46656 27 1
1 gal (US) = 3785.41 cm3 = 231 in3 = 0.83267 gal (UK)
Conversion table weight

Unit g kg t oz lb
g 1 0.001 0.000001 0.03527 0.0022
kg 1000 1 0.001 35.273 2.20459
t 1000000 1000 1 35273 2204.59
oz 28.3495 0.02835 0.000028 1 0.0625
lb 453.592 0.45359 0.000454 16 1
1 tonne (metric) = 1.1023 ton (US) = 0.9842 ton (UK)

Conversion table pressure

Unit kp/cm2 bar Pa = N/m2 kPa lbf/in2 lbf/ft2
kp/cm2 1 0.98067 98066.5 98.0665 14.2233 2048.16
bar 1.01972 1 100000 100 14.5037 2088.6
Pa = N/m2 0.00001 0.001 1 0.001 0.00015 0.02086
kPa 0.01020 0.01 1000 1 0.14504 20.886
lbf/in2 0.07032 0.0689 6894.76 6.89476 1 144
lbf/ft2 0.00047 0.00047 47.88028 0.04788 0.00694 1
kg/cm2 = 735.56 Dry (mmHg) = 0.96784 atm

252 10 Terminology
10 Terminology
Explanations
Term Description
Accumulator Reservoir that stores (accumulates) pressure for, i.e. hydraulic functions.
AdBlue AdBlue contains deionised water mixed with 32.5% urea.
Attachment Part of the machine that grips the load when lifting.
Anti-corrosion agent Prevents oxidation, in simple terms, rustproofing.
Working hydraulics All load handling functions, that is, lift and lower, tilt, side shift, spreading (extension)
and levelling.
Wheelbase Distance between drive axle and steering axle.
Bar Unit to express pressure.
Battery disconnector Cuts off power supply from battery.
Boom Lifting member moveable vertically and longitudinally. Bracket for attachment.
Bottom lift attachment Vertically adjustable “lift legs” for load handling. Grasp the load from underneath.
CAN Controller Area Network - Network for communication between the control units.
CAN bus The network between the control units in the machine.
Central lubrication An automatic system for lubrication of a preset number of lubrication points.
Daily inspection Actions that should be performed daily to ensure the machine's functionality.
Decitonne Tenth of a tonne, measure of machine's lift capacity.
Displacement The oil volume that the pump can supply per pump revolution.
Display "Window" showing digital information, i.e. on steering wheel panel in the cab.
Operating time Number of hours machine has been in operation, shown on hour meter in cab.
Drive axle Driving axle that receives the torque from the drivetrain.
Drivetrain Parts in the machine involved in power transmission; engine, torque converter,
transmission, propeller shaft and drive axle with differential and hub reduction.
ECC Electric Climate Control – Air conditioning system with thermostat-controlled cooling,
dehumidification and heating.
Electrolyte level Fluid level in battery cells.
Expansion tank Tank for coolant.
Fixed displacement Non-adjustable volume (capacity) in a pump.
FMI Fault Message Identifier – The part of the error code indicating the type of error.
Main fuse Located by battery. Breaks the current to all systems in the whole machine.
Hydraulic oil Oil for hydraulic system. See specifications in operator's manual.
Hydraulic oil pump Pump in hydraulic system.
Hydraulic system System that uses oil pressure to transfer power to different functions.
Hanging load Lifted load.
Indicator Manual "sensor", for example, shows that a filter is clogged and needs to be changed.
KAU Kalmar Attachment Unit - Control unit KAU (D7911) is fitted on the attachment and
operates components on the attachment.
KCU Kalmar Cab Unit - Control Unit KCU (D7901) is fitted in the cab and is the control unit
that controls the start-up and shutdown of the machine's electrical system.

10 Terminology – Terminology 253
Term Description
KFU Kalmar Frame Unit - Control unit KFU (D7971) is fitted on the inside of the left-hand
frame member above the drive axle. The control unit operates components in the frame
and on the boom.
KID Kalmar Information Display - Control unit KID (D7950), the display in the cab.
KPU Kalmar Panel Unit - Control unit KPU (D7902) is fitted in the right-hand switch panel in
the cab and operates switches and controls in the cab.
KST Kalmar Service Tool - Computer program for service, calibration, setting and
programming of the machine's control units.
Piston rod Rod that is pushed into the piston's cylinder barrel and is acted upon by the hydraulic
pressure.
Refrigerant Fluid/gas in air conditioning. Must only be handled by authorised trained personnel.
LC Load Centre - Horizontal distance from the front edge of the drive wheel to the centre
of the attachment.
LLMC LLMC (Longitudinal Load Moment Control), see overload system.
Lift capacity Indicates machine's maximum lift capacity.
Lifting point Attaching point for lift device when lifting an object.
Low-emission engine Engine with low emissions of hazardous substances. Manufactured in accordance
with regulations.
Solenoid valve An electro-magnetically controlled valve. See also proportional valve.
Control valve Valves that can be used to control something, for example, to release pressure and thus
lower a boom or a fork.
Machine model Machine type. Specified, for example: DRG 420-450. See also type designation.
Environmental waste Used oils, filters, etc., must be handled according to governing national laws and
regulations.
Torque converter Hydraulic, variable clutch.
Counterweight Weights adapted to the machine's lift capacity to constitute an opposing load when lifting.
Hub reduction Type of final drive (often next to drive wheel) that reduces rpm and increases torque
from the drivetrain.
Node An end point or switching point in a data network. A node on the machine is the same
thing as a control unit on one of the machine's CAN buses.
Node number Each control unit (node) has a Kalmar-unique number used for identification and fault
reporting on the CAN bus.
OHC Over Height Container – Container with parts or load protruding over the holes for
twistlocks. To lift this type of container there are special attachments with lowerable
extensions for twistlocks.
Pilot oil pressure A low control pressure to, for example, a valve.
Planetary gear Type of transmission with gears in constant engagement.
Product alternative One of several alternatives is selected for a machine, e.g. engine alternative.
Progressive steering Quick steering wheel movements give greater steering angles.
Proportional valve An electro-magnetically controlled valve. If a voltage is applied, the valve is activated
in proportion to the voltage amplitude. In simple terms, infinitely variable valve, as
opposed to on/off valve. For example, found on transmission's valve housing.
Reachstacker Machine with special lift boom and top lift attachment for containers.
Recirculation Circulation in a closed system.
Control unit Electronic box that controls the machine's functions. The control units communicate
with each other using the CAN buses.

254 10 Terminology – Terminology
Term Description
SCR Selective Catalytic Reduction – Exhaust technology which means that AdBlue is added
to the exhaust gases in order to reduce the amount of nitrogen oxides (NOx). The urea
in AdBlue breaks down into ammonia, which in the SCR catalytic converter, reacts
with nitrogen oxide (NOx) as harmless nitrogen and water vapour is formed. Available
for Volvo stage 3B/4i engines.
Serial number Unique machine designation. On the machine plate.
Service position How machine should be safely positioned before service may be started.
Servo A small movement by the user results in a large angle, i.e. servo steering.
Servo pressure A low control pressure to control a higher pressure, for example, to a valve.
Side shift Parallel sideways movement of attachment.
Levelling Attachment is tilted, for example if load stands on uneven ground.

SPN Suspect Parameter Number – Is a unique number for machine components. Used in
circuit diagrams and error codes.
Spreading (positioning) Widening of attachment.
Dust reservoir The air filter collects the coarsest particles in a dust reservoir, which is emptied
automatically during operation.
Steering axle Wheel axle with steering.
Buzzer Acoustic alarm to catch the operator's attention.
Option Extra equipment for machine.
Tilting Load is leaned forward or backward.
Top lift Attachment. See attachment.
Transmission oil Oil for transmission and torque converter. See specifications in operator's manual.
Securing machine for transport Actions before transporting machine.
Twistlocks Four locking pins, one in each corner of the attachment, pushed down in corresponding
holes in container and twisted to lock the container when lifting.
Type designation Indicates machine type and capacity. See also machine model.
Maintenance Periodic maintenance actions so that machine functions safely and for a long service life.
UTTO-oil Universal Tractor Transmission Oil.
Variable pump Pump with adjustable flow rate.
Variable displacement Adjustable volume (capacity) of a pump.
Valve slide Moveable part in valve. Determines oil's path.
Rotation bar Rotating unit on attachment, rotates attachment in relation to lift boom.
Wet brakes Brake discs in oil bath.
Overload system A warning system, LLMC (Longitudinal Load Moment Control). The system is used for
stationary load handling, to avoid jeopardising the machine's forward stability. LLMC is
not designed to control lateral stability or stability when operating.

11 Index – Index 255
Index Event menu overload steering axle . . .

Event menu parking brake . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
76
80
Event menu preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Event menu raise/lower cab temperature . . . . . . . 85
A Event menu raise/lower fan speed . . . . . . . . . . 85
Event menu release the parking brake . . . . . . . . . 84
About the documentation kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Event menu rotation stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
About the operator's manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Event menu seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Air filter, engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Event menu service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
ANSI/ITSDF marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Event menu speed limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Event menu start interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Event menu support jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
B Event menu tilt lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Back-up camera and distance warning . . . . . . . . 89 Event menu twistlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Battery and battery disconnector . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Event menu tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Event menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
C
F
CE-marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Central lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Checking accumulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Cleanliness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Fuel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Control for load handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Functions for load handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Fuses for electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Customer settings via display . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
G
Gearshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
D
Daily inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96, 187
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 H
Driver's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Heating / Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 150
Hydraulic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
E
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Engine operating menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 I
Environment and standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Error code indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Identification of the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Error code information on display . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Ignition key lock and start and stop button for the
Error code tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Inspection and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 186
Event menu AdBlue end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Instruments and controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Event menu air filter air conditioning system . . . . . . 84
Event menu arm rest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Event menu automatic spreading 20'–40' . . . . . . . 81 K
Event menu automatic start function. . . . . . . . . . 88 Keep in mind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Event menu automatic stop function . . . . . . . . . . 88
Event menu battery charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Event menu brake temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Event menu contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 L
Event menu control breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Lifting and transporting the machine . . . . . . . . . . 226
Event menu engine coolant temperature . . . . . . . . 77 Lifting load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Event menu heating rear view mirrors/rear windscreen . . 86 Lifting machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Event menu height limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Light panel on boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Event menu intermittent wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Event menu levelling lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Load handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 154
Event menu load centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Long-term storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Event menu low accumulator pressure . . . . . . 75, 79
Event menu low AdBlue level. . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Event menu low coolant level engine . . . . . . . . . 88
Event menu low fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
M
Event menu low tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Event menu low washer fluid level . . . . . . . . . . 83 Mechanical release of parking brake . . . . . . . . . 225
Event menu no operator in seat. . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Menu for active error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Event menu oil temperature hydraulics . . . . . . . . 78 Menu for date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Event menu oil temperature transmission . . . . . . . 78 Menu for inactive error codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Event menu open door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Menu for machine check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Event menu overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Menu for services and settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Event menu overload drive axle . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Menu for statistics and history . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

256 11 Index – Index
Multi-function lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Service brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
O Starting engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Oil, brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Stopping the engine - parking . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Operating menu customer settings . . . . . . . . . . 73
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Operating menu electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Operating menu load centre monitoring . . . . . . . . 72
Operating menu load counter. . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Operating menu scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 T
Operating menu trip computer work shift . . . . . . . . 70
Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Operating menu tyre pressure monitoring . . . . . . . 72
The event menu parking brake not activated and no
Operating menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
operator in the driver's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Optional equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Transmission and hydraulics operating menu . . . . . . 71
Overview description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Transmission oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Transporting load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Transporting the machine . . . . . . . . . . . 223, 227
P Travel direction selector and parking brake . . . . . . . 53
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Tyres and rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
U
R Unloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Reading instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Running-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
W
Warming up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
S Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 While operating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Safety and emergency equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Declaration of Conformity
We, Cargotec Sweden AB, SE-340 10 Lidhult, (Registration No. 556014-5418) herewith
declare that the machine,
Type Reachstacker
Model DRG450-65S5
Serial No A114.XXXXX
Year of construction 2013
Engine Volvo TAD1360VE
is manufactured in conformity with the requirements in

- The Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC
- The Electro Magnetic Compatibility Directive 2004/108/EC

- the harmonised standard EN 1459 Safety of industrial trucks
– Self propelled variable reach trucks.
Name
Position Head Of Counterbalanced Products
Authorized to compile the technical file
InfoString: 2A / KAT / / R / GB / 20130613 / 161727
Place, Date of Issue Signature
Blnk.lxf
last page
Cargotec Sweden AB
Cargotec improves the efficiency of cargo flows by offering solutions for Torggatan 3
the loading and unloading of goods on land and at sea – wherever cargo SE-340 10, Lidhult, Sweden
is on the move. Cargotec’s main daughter brands for cargo handling
Hiab, Kalmar and MacGregor are global market leaders in their fields. tel. +46 372 260 00
Cargotec’s global network offers extensive services that ensure the fax +46 372 263 90
continuous, reliable and sustainable performance of equipment. www.cargotec.com

PDF RS DRG .............

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PDF RS DRG .............

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Reachstacker 42-45 tonnes

Operator’s manual DRG 420-450 IDRG01.03GB

This Operator's manual contains information that you must keep in

Operator's manual, purpose

Cargotec will not accept any responsibility for machine modifications

About machine version

Cargotec reserves the right to make changes to specifications and

Duplication of the content in this manual, in whole or in part, is strictly

All duplication by any means, such as copying, printing, etc., is

Operator’s manual DRG 420-450 IDRG01.03GB

1.1.1 Reading instructions

Read the operator's manual

Read the operator's manual

Read the Maintenance manual

refers to important information in the Maintenance manual.

Read the Maintenance manual

IDRG01.03GB Operator’s manual DRG 420-450

See the machine card for complete specifications of the machine's

Operator’s manual DRG 420-450 IDRG01.03GB

1.2 About the documentation kit

There is supplementary documentation that can be ordered for the

Always indicate publication number when ordering. The publication

IDRG01.03GB Operator’s manual DRG 420-450

1.3 Inspection and maintenance

Maintenance described in this operator's manual can be performed by

Operator’s manual DRG 420-450 IDRG01.03GB

Important to read the operator's manual

In addition, you will obtain a lot of valuable information that makes

Ask your foreman or supervisor if there is anything in the text you do

IDRG01.03GB Operator’s manual DRG 420-450

• The machine may not be operated on public roads unless it has

Operator’s manual DRG 420-450 IDRG01.03GB

2.1 Safety and emergency equipment

The machine may be equipped with the following safety equipment:

IDRG01.03GB Operator’s manual DRG 420-450

As proof that the requirements are fulfilled, the machine is provided

For additional information, see standards under chapter 8 Environment

Operator’s manual DRG 420-450 IDRG01.03GB

2.3 ANSI/ITSDF marking

This machine is ANSI/ITSDF marked. This means that upon delivery it

For additional information, see standards under chapter 8 Environment

IDRG01.03GB Operator’s manual DRG 420-450

2.4 Keep in mind

For machines with SCR-system (emission control with AdBlue):

During work shifts

Operator’s manual DRG 420-450 IDRG01.03GB

IDRG01.03GB Operator’s manual DRG 420-450

Operator’s manual DRG 420-450 IDRG01.03GB

IDRG01.03GB Operator’s manual DRG 420-450

Operator’s manual DRG 420-450 IDRG01.03GB

IDRG01.03GB Operator’s manual DRG 420-450

Operator’s manual DRG 420-450 IDRG01.03GB

IDRG01.03GB Operator’s manual DRG 420-450

Fire prevention measures

Make it a habit to make a visual inspection of the engine and engine

Action after fire

Operator’s manual DRG 420-450 IDRG01.03GB

3.1.1 Identification of the machine

A machine card is supplied together with the spare parts catalogue.

The machine card must be updated when the machine is modified

IDRG01.03GB Operator’s manual DRG 420-450

3.1.2 Overview description

The machine is equipped with one of the following engine alternatives:

The machine is equipped with ZF 5WG261.